Merge branch 'linus' into idle-test

.mailmap

@@ -105,3 +105,4 @@ Uwe Kleine-König <ukleinek@informatik.uni-freiburg.de>
 Uwe Kleine-König <ukl@pengutronix.de>
 Uwe Kleine-König <Uwe.Kleine-Koenig@digi.com>
 Valdis Kletnieks <Valdis.Kletnieks@vt.edu>
+Takashi YOSHII <takashi.yoshii.zj@renesas.com>

CREDITS

@@ -2365,8 +2365,6 @@ E: acme@redhat.com
 W: http://oops.ghostprotocols.net:81/blog/
 P: 1024D/9224DF01 D5DF E3BB E3C8 BCBB F8AD  841A B6AB 4681 9224 DF01
 D: IPX, LLC, DCCP, cyc2x, wl3501_cs, net/ hacks
-S: R. Brasílio Itiberê, 4270/1010 - Água Verde
-S: 80240-060 - Curitiba - Paraná
 S: Brazil
 
 N: Karsten Merker

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh

@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/aggregated_ogms
+Date:           May 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Indicates whether the batman protocol messages of the
+                mesh <mesh_iface> shall be aggregated or not.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bonding
+Date:           June 2010
+Contact:        Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
+Description:
+                Indicates whether the data traffic going through the
+                mesh will be sent using multiple interfaces at the
+                same time (if available).
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/fragmentation
+Date:           October 2010
+Contact:        Andreas Langer <an.langer@gmx.de>
+Description:
+                Indicates whether the data traffic going through the
+                mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the
+                packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth
+Date:           October 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Defines the bandwidth which is propagated by this
+                node if gw_mode was set to 'server'.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_mode
+Date:           October 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Defines the state of the gateway features. Can be
+                either 'off', 'client' or 'server'.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_sel_class
+Date:           October 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Defines the selection criteria this node will use
+                to choose a gateway if gw_mode was set to 'client'.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/orig_interval
+Date:           May 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Defines the interval in milliseconds in which batman
+                sends its protocol messages.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/hop_penalty
+Date:           Oct 2010
+Contact:        Linus Lüssing <linus.luessing@web.de>
+Description:
+		Defines the penalty which will be applied to an
+		originator message's tq-field on every hop.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/vis_mode
+Date:           May 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Each batman node only maintains information about its
+                own local neighborhood, therefore generating graphs
+                showing the topology of the entire mesh is not easily
+                feasible without having a central instance to collect
+                the local topologies from all nodes. This file allows
+                to activate the collecting (server) mode.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_dpi
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_dpi
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the
@@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ Description:	It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the
 
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile.
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
 		left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5]
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the
 		store.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Description:	When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
 		The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
 		data.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5.
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5.
 		When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
 		and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/tcu
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Description:	The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user
 		Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes
 		around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/weight
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight
 Date:		March 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus

@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in
+		range 0-4.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
+		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
+		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
+		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
+		left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes
+		internally.
+		When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific
+		button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are
+		included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_buttons holds informations about button layout.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
+		contained in the data.
+		This file is writeonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_buttons holds informations about button layout.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
+		The returned data is 77 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
+		contained in the data.
+		This file is writeonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
+		The returned data is 43 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These
+		can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be
+		set. The data has to be 6 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
+                When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile
+                that's active when the mouse is powered on.
+		When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
+		and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit
+		can be initiated/cancelled.
+		The data has to be 3 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the
+		sampled underground. This works only in the course of a
+		calibration process initiated with tcu.
+		The returned data is 1028 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_cpi
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_cpi
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the
@@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ Description:	It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the
 
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in
 		range 0-4.
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
 		left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile_settings
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		contained in the data.
 		This file is writeonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]_settings
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The returned data is 13 bytes in size.
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile_buttons
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		contained in the data.
 		This file is writeonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]_buttons
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The returned data is 19 bytes in size.
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
                 that's active when the mouse is powered on.
 		This file is readonly.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ideapad/camera_power
+Date:		Dec 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.37
+Contact:	"Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com>"
+Description:
+		Control the power of camera module. 1 means on, 0 means off.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty

@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+What:		/sys/class/tty/console/active
+Date:		Nov 2010
+Contact:	Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org>
+Description:
+		 Shows the list of currently configured
+		 console devices, like 'tty1 ttyS0'.
+		 The last entry in the file is the active
+		 device connected to /dev/console.
+		 The file supports poll() to detect virtual
+		 console switches.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/tty0/active
+Date:		Nov 2010
+Contact:	Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org>
+Description:
+		 Shows the currently active virtual console
+		 device, like 'tty1'.
+		 The file supports poll() to detect virtual
+		 console switches.

Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl

@@ -146,6 +146,7 @@
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mgmt
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_mgmt_tx_status
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_rssi_notify
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_pktloss_notify
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_michael_mic_failure
       </chapter>
       <chapter>
@@ -332,10 +333,16 @@
           <title>functions/definitions</title>
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_control_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rate_control_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_ni
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_ni
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration
@@ -346,6 +353,7 @@
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_stopped
         </sect1>
       </chapter>
 
@@ -354,6 +362,13 @@
 !Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags
       </chapter>
+
+      <chapter id="workqueue">
+        <title>The mac80211 workqueue</title>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211 workqueue
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_work
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_delayed_work
+      </chapter>
     </part>
 
     <part id="advanced">
@@ -374,6 +389,9 @@
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tkip_key_type
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_key
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_removed
       </chapter>
 
       <chapter id="powersave">
@@ -417,6 +435,18 @@
           supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto
           with it.
         </para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic
+      </chapter>
+
+      <chapter id="station-handling">
+        <title>Station handling</title>
+        <para>TODO</para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake
       </chapter>
 
       <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload">
@@ -424,6 +454,28 @@
         <para>TBD</para>
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed
       </chapter>
+
+      <chapter id="aggregation">
+        <title>Aggregation</title>
+        <sect1>
+          <title>TX A-MPDU aggregation</title>
+!Pnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c TX A-MPDU aggregation
+!Cnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c
+        </sect1>
+        <sect1>
+          <title>RX A-MPDU aggregation</title>
+!Pnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c RX A-MPDU aggregation
+!Cnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c
+        </sect1>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action
+      </chapter>
+
+      <chapter id="smps">
+        <title>Spatial Multiplexing Powersave (SMPS)</title>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Spatial multiplexing power save
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_request_smps
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_smps_mode
+      </chapter>
     </part>
 
     <part id="rate-control">
@@ -435,9 +487,16 @@
          interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers.
         </para>
       </partintro>
-      <chapter id="dummy">
-        <title>dummy chapter</title>
+      <chapter id="ratecontrol-api">
+        <title>Rate Control API</title>
         <para>TBD</para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_changed
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate_control
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_send_low
       </chapter>
     </part>
 
@@ -485,6 +544,13 @@
         </sect1>
       </chapter>
 
+      <chapter id="aggregation-internals">
+        <title>Aggregation</title>
+!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_ampdu_mlme
+!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_tx
+!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_rx
+      </chapter>
+
       <chapter id="synchronisation">
         <title>Synchronisation</title>
         <para>TBD</para>

Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl

@@ -303,6 +303,10 @@ X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c
 !Edrivers/input/input.c
 !Edrivers/input/ff-core.c
 !Edrivers/input/ff-memless.c
+     </sect1>
+     <sect1><title>Multitouch Library</title>
+!Iinclude/linux/input/mt.h
+!Edrivers/input/input-mt.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Polled input devices</title>
 !Iinclude/linux/input-polldev.h

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml

@@ -34,8 +34,7 @@
       <varlistentry>
 	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <link
-linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file, for example
+	  <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file, for example
 VIDIOC_QUERYCAP.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
@@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ file descriptor. An ioctl <parameter>request</parameter> has encoded
 in it whether the argument is an input, output or read/write
 parameter, and the size of the argument <parameter>argp</parameter> in
 bytes. Macros and defines specifying V4L2 ioctl requests are located
-in the <link linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file.
+in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file.
 Applications should use their own copy, not include the version in the
 kernel sources on the system they compile on. All V4L2 ioctl requests,
 their respective function and parameters are specified in <xref

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml

@@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ leftmost pixel of the second row from the top, and so on. The last row
 has just as many pad bytes after it as the other rows.</para>
 
     <para>In V4L2 each format has an identifier which looks like
-<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <link
-linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. These identifiers
+<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename>
+header file. These identifiers
 represent <link linkend="v4l2-fourcc">four character codes</link>
 which are also listed below, however they are not the same as those
 used in the Windows world.</para>

Documentation/Makefile

@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
 obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
 	filesystems/ filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \
-	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
+	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ vm/ watchdog/src/

Documentation/RCU/trace.txt

@@ -1,18 +1,22 @@
 CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats
 
 
-The rcutree implementation of RCU provides debugfs trace output that
-summarizes counters and state.  This information is useful for debugging
-RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU.
-The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats.
+The rcutree and rcutiny implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace
+output that summarizes counters and state.  This information is useful for
+debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU.
+The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats, first
+for rcutree and next for rcutiny.
 
 
-Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats
+CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats
 
-This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the
+These implementations of RCU provides five debugfs files under the
 top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct
-rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and
-rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy).
+rcu_data), rcu/rcudata.csv (which is a .csv spreadsheet version of
+rcu/rcudata), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters),
+rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy), and
+rcu/rcu_pending (which displays counts of the reasons that the
+rcu_pending() function decided that there was core RCU work to do).
 
 The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows:
 
@@ -130,7 +134,8 @@ o	"ci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked for
 	been registered in absence of CPU-hotplug activity.
 
 o	"co" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been orphaned due to
-	this CPU going offline.
+	this CPU going offline.  These orphaned callbacks have been moved
+	to an arbitrarily chosen online CPU.
 
 o	"ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted due to
 	other CPUs going offline.  Note that ci+co-ca+ql is the number of
@@ -168,12 +173,12 @@ o	"gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started.  It is
 
 The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines:
 
-c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 oqlen=0
+c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6
 1/1 .>. 0:127 ^0    
 3/3 .>. 0:35 ^0    0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1    0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2    0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3    
 3/3f .>. 0:5 ^0    2/3 .>. 6:11 ^1    0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2    0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3    0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4    0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5    0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0    0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1    0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2    0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3    0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4    0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5    0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0    0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1    0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2    0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3    0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4    0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5    0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0    0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1    0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2    0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3    
 rcu_bh:
-c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 oqlen=0
+c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0
 0/1 .>. 0:127 ^0    
 0/3 .>. 0:35 ^0    0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1    0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2    0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3    
 0/3f .>. 0:5 ^0    0/3 .>. 6:11 ^1    0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2    0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3    0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4    0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5    0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0    0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1    0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2    0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3    0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4    0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5    0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0    0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1    0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2    0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3    0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4    0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5    0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0    0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1    0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2    0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3
@@ -212,11 +217,6 @@ o	"fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that
 	exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above)
 	due to contention on ->fqslock.
 
-o	"oqlen" is the number of callbacks on the "orphan" callback
-	list.  RCU callbacks are placed on this list by CPUs going
-	offline, and are "adopted" either by the CPU helping the outgoing
-	CPU or by the next rcu_barrier*() call, whichever comes first.
-
 o	Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct
 	rcu_node.  Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from
 	root to leaves.  It is best to think of the rcu_data structures
@@ -326,3 +326,115 @@ o	"nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing.  Alert
 	readers will note that the rcu "nn" number for a given CPU very
 	closely matches the rcu_bh "np" number for that same CPU.  This
 	is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending().
+
+
+CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats
+
+These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the
+top-level directory RCU, namely rcu/rcudata, which displays fields in
+rcu_bh_ctrlblk, rcu_sched_ctrlblk and, for CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU,
+rcu_preempt_ctrlblk.
+
+The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" is as follows:
+
+rcu_preempt: qlen=24 gp=1097669 g197/p197/c197 tasks=...
+             ttb=. btg=no ntb=184 neb=0 nnb=183 j=01f7 bt=0274
+             normal balk: nt=1097669 gt=0 bt=371 b=0 ny=25073378 nos=0
+             exp balk: bt=0 nos=0
+rcu_sched: qlen: 0
+rcu_bh: qlen: 0
+
+This is split into rcu_preempt, rcu_sched, and rcu_bh sections, with the
+rcu_preempt section appearing only in CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU builds.
+The last three lines of the rcu_preempt section appear only in
+CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernel builds.  The fields are as follows:
+
+o	"qlen" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting either
+	for an RCU grace period or waiting to be invoked.  This is the
+	only field present for rcu_sched and rcu_bh, due to the
+	short-circuiting of grace period in those two cases.
+
+o	"gp" is the number of grace periods that have completed.
+
+o	"g197/p197/c197" displays the grace-period state, with the
+	"g" number being the number of grace periods that have started
+	(mod 256), the "p" number being the number of grace periods
+	that the CPU has responded to (also mod 256), and the "c"
+	number being the number of grace periods that have completed
+	(once again mode 256).
+
+	Why have both "gp" and "g"?  Because the data flowing into
+	"gp" is only present in a CONFIG_RCU_TRACE kernel.
+
+o	"tasks" is a set of bits.  The first bit is "T" if there are
+	currently tasks that have recently blocked within an RCU
+	read-side critical section, the second bit is "N" if any of the
+	aforementioned tasks are blocking the current RCU grace period,
+	and the third bit is "E" if any of the aforementioned tasks are
+	blocking the current expedited grace period.  Each bit is "."
+	if the corresponding condition does not hold.
+
+o	"ttb" is a single bit.  It is "B" if any of the blocked tasks
+	need to be priority boosted and "." otherwise.
+
+o	"btg" indicates whether boosting has been carried out during
+	the current grace period, with "exp" indicating that boosting
+	is in progress for an expedited grace period, "no" indicating
+	that boosting has not yet started for a normal grace period,
+	"begun" indicating that boosting has bebug for a normal grace
+	period, and "done" indicating that boosting has completed for
+	a normal grace period.
+
+o	"ntb" is the total number of tasks subjected to RCU priority boosting
+	periods since boot.
+
+o	"neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had
+	to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot.
+
+o	"nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had
+	to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot.
+
+o	"j" is the low-order 12 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal.
+
+o	"bt" is the low-order 12 bits of the value that the jiffies counter
+	will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin.
+
+o	In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows:
+
+	o	"nt" is the number of times that the system balked from
+		boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost.
+		Note that the system will balk from boosting even if the
+		grace period is overdue when the currently running task
+		is looping within an RCU read-side critical section.
+		There is no point in boosting in this case, because
+		boosting a running task won't make it run any faster.
+
+	o	"gt" is the number of times that the system balked
+		from boosting because, although there were blocked tasks,
+		none of them were preventing the current grace period
+		from completing.
+
+	o	"bt" is the number of times that the system balked
+		from boosting because boosting was already in progress.
+
+	o	"b" is the number of times that the system balked from
+		boosting because boosting had already completed for
+		the grace period in question.
+
+	o	"ny" is the number of times that the system balked from
+		boosting because it was not yet time to start boosting
+		the grace period in question.
+
+	o	"nos" is the number of times that the system balked from
+		boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified")
+		reasons.  This can actually happen due to races involving
+		increments of the jiffies counter.
+
+o	In the line beginning with "exp balk", the fields are as follows:
+
+	o	"bt" is the number of times that the system balked from
+		boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost.
+
+	o	"nos" is the number of times that the system balked from
+		 boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified")
+		 reasons.

Documentation/arm/00-INDEX

@@ -34,3 +34,5 @@ memory.txt
 	- description of the virtual memory layout
 nwfpe/
 	- NWFPE floating point emulator documentation
+swp_emulation
+	- SWP/SWPB emulation handler/logging description

Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm

@@ -127,3 +127,28 @@ implementation needs:
 10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f)
 
 11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void)
+
+Customizing OPP for platform
+============================
+Defining CONFIG_PM should enable OPP layer for the silicon
+and the registration of OPP table should take place automatically.
+However, in special cases, the default OPP table may need to be
+tweaked, for e.g.:
+ * enable default OPPs which are disabled by default, but which
+   could be enabled on a platform
+ * Disable an unsupported OPP on the platform
+ * Define and add a custom opp table entry
+in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows:
+arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c
+	#include "pm.h"
+	....
+	static void __init omap_xyz_init_irq(void)
+	{
+		....
+		/* Initialize the default table */
+		omapx_opp_init();
+		/* Do customization to the defaults */
+		....
+	}
+NOTE: omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required
+based on the omap family.

Documentation/arm/swp_emulation

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Software emulation of deprecated SWP instruction (CONFIG_SWP_EMULATE)
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ARMv6 architecture deprecates use of the SWP/SWPB instructions, and recommeds
+moving to the load-locked/store-conditional instructions LDREX and STREX.
+
+ARMv7 multiprocessing extensions introduce the ability to disable these
+instructions, triggering an undefined instruction exception when executed.
+Trapped instructions are emulated using an LDREX/STREX or LDREXB/STREXB
+sequence. If a memory access fault (an abort) occurs, a segmentation fault is
+signalled to the triggering process.
+
+/proc/cpu/swp_emulation holds some statistics/information, including the PID of
+the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example:
+---
+Emulated SWP:		12
+Emulated SWPB:		0
+Aborted SWP{B}:		1
+Last process:		314
+---
+
+NOTE: when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external
+transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update
+atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can
+cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as
+the STREX operation will always fail.
+

Documentation/coccinelle.txt

@@ -36,6 +36,10 @@ as a regular user, and install it with
 
         sudo make install
 
+The semantic patches in the kernel will work best with Coccinelle version
+0.2.4 or later.  Using earlier versions may incur some parse errors in the
+semantic patch code, but any results that are obtained should still be
+correct.
 
  Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Documentation/dontdiff

@@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ aic7*reg_print.c*
 aic7*seq.h*
 aicasm
 aicdb.h*
+altivec1.c
+altivec2.c
+altivec4.c
+altivec8.c
 asm-offsets.h
 asm_offsets.h
 autoconf.h*
@@ -76,6 +80,7 @@ btfixupprep
 build
 bvmlinux
 bzImage*
+capflags.c
 classlist.h*
 comp*.log
 compile.h*
@@ -94,6 +99,7 @@ devlist.h*
 docproc
 elf2ecoff
 elfconfig.h*
+evergreen_reg_safe.h
 fixdep
 flask.h
 fore200e_mkfirm
@@ -108,9 +114,16 @@ genksyms
 *_gray256.c
 ihex2fw
 ikconfig.h*
+inat-tables.c
 initramfs_data.cpio
 initramfs_data.cpio.gz
 initramfs_list
+int16.c
+int1.c
+int2.c
+int32.c
+int4.c
+int8.c
 kallsyms
 kconfig
 keywords.c
@@ -140,6 +153,7 @@ mkprep
 mktables
 mktree
 modpost
+modules.builtin
 modules.order
 modversions.h*
 ncscope.*
@@ -153,14 +167,23 @@ pca200e.bin
 pca200e_ecd.bin2
 piggy.gz
 piggyback
+piggy.S
 pnmtologo
 ppc_defs.h*
 pss_boot.h
 qconf
+r100_reg_safe.h
+r200_reg_safe.h
+r300_reg_safe.h
+r420_reg_safe.h
+r600_reg_safe.h
 raid6altivec*.c
 raid6int*.c
 raid6tables.c
 relocs
+rn50_reg_safe.h
+rs600_reg_safe.h
+rv515_reg_safe.h
 series
 setup
 setup.bin
@@ -169,6 +192,7 @@ sImage
 sm_tbl*
 split-include
 syscalltab.h
+tables.c
 tags
 tftpboot.img
 timeconst.h
@@ -190,6 +214,7 @@ vmlinux
 vmlinux-*
 vmlinux.aout
 vmlinux.lds
+voffset.h
 vsyscall.lds
 vsyscall_32.lds
 wanxlfw.inc
@@ -200,3 +225,4 @@ wakeup.elf
 wakeup.lds
 zImage*
 zconf.hash.c
+zoffset.h

Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt

@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ and run
 Other LG firmware can be extracted manually from US280D.sys
 only found in windows/system32/driver.
 
-dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=42616 count=3668 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw
+dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=42360 count=3924 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw
 
 for DM04 LME2510C (LG Tuner)
 ---------------------------

Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -97,36 +97,38 @@ Who:	Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and from Video devices.
-When:	kernel 2.6.38
-Files:	include/linux/videodev.h
-Check:	include/linux/videodev.h
-Why:	V4L1 AP1 was replaced by V4L2 API during migration from 2.4 to 2.6
-	series. The old API have lots of drawbacks and don't provide enough
-	means to work with all video and audio standards. The newer API is
-	already available on the main drivers and should be used instead.
-	Newer drivers should use v4l_compat_translate_ioctl function to handle
-	old calls, replacing to newer ones.
-	Decoder iocts are using internally to allow video drivers to
-	communicate with video decoders. This should also be improved to allow
-	V4L2 calls being translated into compatible internal ioctls.
-	Compatibility ioctls will be provided, for a while, via 
-	v4l1-compat module. 
-Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	Video4Linux obsolete drivers using V4L1 API
-When:	kernel 2.6.38
-Files:	drivers/staging/cpia/* drivers/staging/stradis/*
-Check:	drivers/staging/cpia/cpia.c drivers/staging/stradis/stradis.c
+When:	kernel 2.6.39
+Files:	drivers/staging/se401/* drivers/staging/usbvideo/*
+Check:	drivers/staging/se401/se401.c drivers/staging/usbvideo/usbvideo.c
 Why:	There are some drivers still using V4L1 API, despite all efforts we've done
 	to migrate. Those drivers are for obsolete hardware that the old maintainer
 	didn't care (or not have the hardware anymore), and that no other developer
 	could find any hardware to buy. They probably have no practical usage today,
 	and people with such old hardware could probably keep using an older version
-	of the kernel. Those drivers will be moved to staging on 2.6.37 and, if nobody
-	care enough to port and test them with V4L2 API, they'll be removed on 2.6.38.
+	of the kernel. Those drivers will be moved to staging on 2.6.38 and, if nobody
+	cares enough to port and test them with V4L2 API, they'll be removed on 2.6.39.
+Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Video4Linux: Remove obsolete ioctl's
+When:	kernel 2.6.39
+Files:	include/media/videodev2.h
+Why:	Some ioctl's were defined wrong on 2.6.2 and 2.6.6, using the wrong
+	type of R/W arguments. They were fixed, but the old ioctl names are
+	still there, maintained to avoid breaking binary compatibility:
+	  #define VIDIOC_OVERLAY_OLD   	_IOWR('V', 14, int)
+	  #define VIDIOC_S_PARM_OLD	_IOW('V', 22, struct v4l2_streamparm)
+	  #define VIDIOC_S_CTRL_OLD	_IOW('V', 28, struct v4l2_control)
+	  #define VIDIOC_G_AUDIO_OLD	_IOWR('V', 33, struct v4l2_audio)
+	  #define VIDIOC_G_AUDOUT_OLD	_IOWR('V', 49, struct v4l2_audioout)
+	  #define VIDIOC_CROPCAP_OLD	_IOR('V', 58, struct v4l2_cropcap)
+	There's no sense on preserving those forever, as it is very doubtful
+	that someone would try to use a such old binary with a modern kernel.
+	Removing them will allow us to remove some magic done at the V4L ioctl
+	handler.
+
 Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
 
 ---------------------------
@@ -564,3 +566,13 @@ Why:	This field is deprecated. I2C device drivers shouldn't change their
 Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 
 ----------------------------
+
+What:	cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]()
+When:	2.6.39
+
+Why:	The functions have been superceded by cancel_delayed_work_sync()
+	quite some time ago.  The conversion is trivial and there is no
+	in-kernel user left.
+Who:	Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org>
+
+----------------------------

Documentation/filesystems/Locking

@@ -9,22 +9,25 @@ be able to use diff(1).
 
 --------------------------- dentry_operations --------------------------
 prototypes:
-	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, int);
-	int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *);
-	int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
+	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+			struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+			const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+			unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *);
 	int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *);
 	void (*d_release)(struct dentry *);
 	void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *);
 	char *(*d_dname)((struct dentry *dentry, char *buffer, int buflen);
 
 locking rules:
-		dcache_lock	rename_lock	->d_lock	may block
-d_revalidate:	no		no		no		yes
-d_hash		no		no		no		yes
-d_compare:	no		yes		no		no 
-d_delete:	yes		no		yes		no
-d_release:	no		no		no		yes
-d_iput:		no		no		no		yes
+		rename_lock	->d_lock	may block	rcu-walk
+d_revalidate:	no		no		yes (ref-walk)	maybe
+d_hash		no		no		no		maybe
+d_compare:	yes		no		no		maybe
+d_delete:	no		yes		no		no
+d_release:	no		no		yes		no
+d_iput:		no		no		yes		no
 d_dname:	no		no		no		no
 
 --------------------------- inode_operations --------------------------- 
@@ -44,8 +47,8 @@ ata *);
 	void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
 	void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *);
 	void (*truncate) (struct inode *);
-	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *);
-	int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int);
+	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int);
+	int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int);
 	int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *);
 	int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *, struct dentry *, struct kstat *);
 	int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int);
@@ -73,7 +76,7 @@ follow_link:	no
 put_link:	no
 truncate:	yes		(see below)
 setattr:	yes
-permission:	no
+permission:	no (may not block if called in rcu-walk mode)
 check_acl:	no
 getattr:	no
 setxattr:	yes

Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt

@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
-RCU-based dcache locking model
-==============================
-
-On many workloads, the most common operation on dcache is to look up a
-dentry, given a parent dentry and the name of the child. Typically,
-for every open(), stat() etc., the dentry corresponding to the
-pathname will be looked up by walking the tree starting with the first
-component of the pathname and using that dentry along with the next
-component to look up the next level and so on. Since it is a frequent
-operation for workloads like multiuser environments and web servers,
-it is important to optimize this path.
-
-Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup and thus in
-every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk
-algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and
-walking as many cached path component dentries as possible. This
-significantly decreases the number of acquisition of
-dcache_lock. However it also increases the lock hold time
-significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. Since
-2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU
-to make dcache look-up lock-free.
-
-The current dcache locking model is not very different from the
-existing dcache locking model. Prior to 2.5.62 kernel, dcache_lock
-protected the hash chain, d_child, d_alias, d_lru lists as well as
-d_inode and several other things like mount look-up. RCU-based changes
-affect only the way the hash chain is protected. For everything else
-the dcache_lock must be taken for both traversing as well as
-updating. The hash chain updates too take the dcache_lock.  The
-significant change is the way d_lookup traverses the hash chain, it
-doesn't acquire the dcache_lock for this and rely on RCU to ensure
-that the dentry has not been *freed*.
-
-
-Dcache locking details
-======================
-
-For many multi-user workloads, open() and stat() on files are very
-frequently occurring operations. Both involve walking of path names to
-find the dentry corresponding to the concerned file. In 2.4 kernel,
-dcache_lock was held during look-up of each path component. Contention
-and cache-line bouncing of this global lock caused significant
-scalability problems. With the introduction of RCU in Linux kernel,
-this was worked around by making the look-up of path components during
-path walking lock-free.
-
-
-Safe lock-free look-up of dcache hash table
-===========================================
-
-Dcache is a complex data structure with the hash table entries also
-linked together in other lists. In 2.4 kernel, dcache_lock protected
-all the lists. We applied RCU only on hash chain walking. The rest of
-the lists are still protected by dcache_lock.  Some of the important
-changes are :
-
-1. The deletion from hash chain is done using hlist_del_rcu() macro
-   which doesn't initialize next pointer of the deleted dentry and
-   this allows us to walk safely lock-free while a deletion is
-   happening.
-
-2. Insertion of a dentry into the hash table is done using
-   hlist_add_head_rcu() which take care of ordering the writes - the
-   writes to the dentry must be visible before the dentry is
-   inserted. This works in conjunction with hlist_for_each_rcu(),
-   which has since been replaced by hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), while
-   walking the hash chain. The only requirement is that all
-   initialization to the dentry must be done before
-   hlist_add_head_rcu() since we don't have dcache_lock protection
-   while traversing the hash chain. This isn't different from the
-   existing code.
-
-3. The dentry looked up without holding dcache_lock by cannot be
-   returned for walking if it is unhashed. It then may have a NULL
-   d_inode or other bogosity since RCU doesn't protect the other
-   fields in the dentry. We therefore use a flag DCACHE_UNHASHED to
-   indicate unhashed dentries and use this in conjunction with a
-   per-dentry lock (d_lock). Once looked up without the dcache_lock,
-   we acquire the per-dentry lock (d_lock) and check if the dentry is
-   unhashed. If so, the look-up is failed. If not, the reference count
-   of the dentry is increased and the dentry is returned.
-
-4. Once a dentry is looked up, it must be ensured during the path walk
-   for that component it doesn't go away. In pre-2.5.10 code, this was
-   done holding a reference to the dentry. dcache_rcu does the same.
-   In some sense, dcache_rcu path walking looks like the pre-2.5.10
-   version.
-
-5. All dentry hash chain updates must take the dcache_lock as well as
-   the per-dentry lock in that order. dput() does this to ensure that
-   a dentry that has just been looked up in another CPU doesn't get
-   deleted before dget() can be done on it.
-
-6. There are several ways to do reference counting of RCU protected
-   objects. One such example is in ipv4 route cache where deferred
-   freeing (using call_rcu()) is done as soon as the reference count
-   goes to zero. This cannot be done in the case of dentries because
-   tearing down of dentries require blocking (dentry_iput()) which
-   isn't supported from RCU callbacks. Instead, tearing down of
-   dentries happen synchronously in dput(), but actual freeing happens
-   later when RCU grace period is over. This allows safe lock-free
-   walking of the hash chains, but a matched dentry may have been
-   partially torn down. The checking of DCACHE_UNHASHED flag with
-   d_lock held detects such dentries and prevents them from being
-   returned from look-up.
-
-
-Maintaining POSIX rename semantics
-==================================
-
-Since look-up of dentries is lock-free, it can race against a
-concurrent rename operation. For example, during rename of file A to
-B, look-up of either A or B must succeed.  So, if look-up of B happens
-after A has been removed from the hash chain but not added to the new
-hash chain, it may fail.  Also, a comparison while the name is being
-written concurrently by a rename may result in false positive matches
-violating rename semantics.  Issues related to race with rename are
-handled as described below :
-
-1. Look-up can be done in two ways - d_lookup() which is safe from
-   simultaneous renames and __d_lookup() which is not.  If
-   __d_lookup() fails, it must be followed up by a d_lookup() to
-   correctly determine whether a dentry is in the hash table or
-   not. d_lookup() protects look-ups using a sequence lock
-   (rename_lock).
-
-2. The name associated with a dentry (d_name) may be changed if a
-   rename is allowed to happen simultaneously. To avoid memcmp() in
-   __d_lookup() go out of bounds due to a rename and false positive
-   comparison, the name comparison is done while holding the
-   per-dentry lock. This prevents concurrent renames during this
-   operation.
-
-3. Hash table walking during look-up may move to a different bucket as
-   the current dentry is moved to a different bucket due to rename.
-   But we use hlists in dcache hash table and they are
-   null-terminated.  So, even if a dentry moves to a different bucket,
-   hash chain walk will terminate. [with a list_head list, it may not
-   since termination is when the list_head in the original bucket is
-   reached].  Since we redo the d_parent check and compare name while
-   holding d_lock, lock-free look-up will not race against d_move().
-
-4. There can be a theoretical race when a dentry keeps coming back to
-   original bucket due to double moves. Due to this look-up may
-   consider that it has never moved and can end up in a infinite loop.
-   But this is not any worse that theoretical livelocks we already
-   have in the kernel.
-
-
-Important guidelines for filesystem developers related to dcache_rcu
-====================================================================
-
-1. Existing dcache interfaces (pre-2.5.62) exported to filesystem
-   don't change. Only dcache internal implementation changes. However
-   filesystems *must not* delete from the dentry hash chains directly
-   using the list macros like allowed earlier. They must use dcache
-   APIs like d_drop() or __d_drop() depending on the situation.
-
-2. d_flags is now protected by a per-dentry lock (d_lock). All access
-   to d_flags must be protected by it.
-
-3. For a hashed dentry, checking of d_count needs to be protected by
-   d_lock.
-
-
-Papers and other documentation on dcache locking
-================================================
-
-1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124).
-
-2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html
-
-
-

Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt

@@ -457,6 +457,9 @@ ChangeLog
 
 Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog.
 
+2.1.30:
+	- Fix writev() (it kept writing the first segment over and over again
+	  instead of moving onto subsequent segments).
 2.1.29:
 	- Fix a deadlock when mounting read-write.
 2.1.28:

Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+Path walking and name lookup locking
+====================================
+
+Path resolution is the finding a dentry corresponding to a path name string, by
+performing a path walk. Typically, for every open(), stat() etc., the path name
+will be resolved. Paths are resolved by walking the namespace tree, starting
+with the first component of the pathname (eg. root or cwd) with a known dentry,
+then finding the child of that dentry, which is named the next component in the
+path string. Then repeating the lookup from the child dentry and finding its
+child with the next element, and so on.
+
+Since it is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser environments and
+web servers, it is important to optimize this code.
+
+Path walking synchronisation history:
+Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup (dcache hash lookup) and
+thus in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk
+algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and walking
+as many cached path component dentries as possible. This significantly
+decreases the number of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases
+the lock hold time significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines.
+Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU to
+make dcache look-up lock-free.
+
+All the above algorithms required taking a lock and reference count on the
+dentry that was looked up, so that may be used as the basis for walking the
+next path element. This is inefficient and unscalable. It is inefficient
+because of the locks and atomic operations required for every dentry element
+slows things down. It is not scalable because many parallel applications that
+are path-walk intensive tend to do path lookups starting from a common dentry
+(usually, the root "/" or current working directory). So contention on these
+common path elements causes lock and cacheline queueing.
+
+Since 2.6.38, RCU is used to make a significant part of the entire path walk
+(including dcache look-up) completely "store-free" (so, no locks, atomics, or
+even stores into cachelines of common dentries). This is known as "rcu-walk"
+path walking.
+
+Path walking overview
+=====================
+
+A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a
+sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in
+the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name
+elements are sub-strings, seperated by '/'.
+
+Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to
+(usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking
+the path given by the name's starting point (which we know in advance -- eg.
+current->fs->cwd or current->fs->root) as the first parent of the lookup. Then
+iteratively for each subsequent name element, look up the child of the current
+parent with the given name and if it is not the desired entry, make it the
+parent for the next lookup.
+
+A parent, of course, must be a directory, and we must have appropriate
+permissions on the parent inode to be able to walk into it.
+
+Turning the child into a parent for the next lookup requires more checks and
+procedures. Symlinks essentially substitute the symlink name for the target
+name in the name string, and require some recursive path walking.  Mount points
+must be followed into (thus changing the vfsmount that subsequent path elements
+refer to), switching from the mount point path to the root of the particular
+mounted vfsmount. These behaviours are variously modified depending on the
+exact path walking flags.
+
+Path walking then must, broadly, do several particular things:
+- find the start point of the walk;
+- perform permissions and validity checks on inodes;
+- perform dcache hash name lookups on (parent, name element) tuples;
+- traverse mount points;
+- traverse symlinks;
+- lookup and create missing parts of the path on demand.
+
+Safe store-free look-up of dcache hash table
+============================================
+
+Dcache name lookup
+------------------
+In order to lookup a dcache (parent, name) tuple, we take a hash on the tuple
+and use that to select a bucket in the dcache-hash table. The list of entries
+in that bucket is then walked, and we do a full comparison of each entry
+against our (parent, name) tuple.
+
+The hash lists are RCU protected, so list walking is not serialised with
+concurrent updates (insertion, deletion from the hash). This is a standard RCU
+list application with the exception of renames, which will be covered below.
+
+Parent and name members of a dentry, as well as its membership in the dcache
+hash, and its inode are protected by the per-dentry d_lock spinlock. A
+reference is taken on the dentry (while the fields are verified under d_lock),
+and this stabilises its d_inode pointer and actual inode. This gives a stable
+point to perform the next step of our path walk against.
+
+These members are also protected by d_seq seqlock, although this offers
+read-only protection and no durability of results, so care must be taken when
+using d_seq for synchronisation (see seqcount based lookups, below).
+
+Renames
+-------
+Back to the rename case. In usual RCU protected lists, the only operations that
+will happen to an object is insertion, and then eventually removal from the
+list. The object will not be reused until an RCU grace period is complete.
+This ensures the RCU list traversal primitives can run over the object without
+problems (see RCU documentation for how this works).
+
+However when a dentry is renamed, its hash value can change, requiring it to be
+moved to a new hash list. Allocating and inserting a new alias would be
+expensive and also problematic for directory dentries. Latency would be far to
+high to wait for a grace period after removing the dentry and before inserting
+it in the new hash bucket. So what is done is to insert the dentry into the
+new list immediately.
+
+However, when the dentry's list pointers are updated to point to objects in the
+new list before waiting for a grace period, this can result in a concurrent RCU
+lookup of the old list veering off into the new (incorrect) list and missing
+the remaining dentries on the list.
+
+There is no fundamental problem with walking down the wrong list, because the
+dentry comparisons will never match. However it is fatal to miss a matching
+dentry. So a seqlock is used to detect when a rename has occurred, and so the
+lookup can be retried.
+
+         1      2      3
+        +---+  +---+  +---+
+hlist-->| N-+->| N-+->| N-+->
+head <--+-P |<-+-P |<-+-P |
+        +---+  +---+  +---+
+
+Rename of dentry 2 may require it deleted from the above list, and inserted
+into a new list. Deleting 2 gives the following list.
+
+         1             3
+        +---+         +---+     (don't worry, the longer pointers do not
+hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+->    impose a measurable performance overhead
+head <--+-P |<--------+-P |      on modern CPUs)
+        +---+         +---+
+          ^      2      ^
+          |    +---+    |
+          |    | N-+----+
+          +----+-P |
+               +---+
+
+This is a standard RCU-list deletion, which leaves the deleted object's
+pointers intact, so a concurrent list walker that is currently looking at
+object 2 will correctly continue to object 3 when it is time to traverse the
+next object.
+
+However, when inserting object 2 onto a new list, we end up with this:
+
+         1             3
+        +---+         +---+
+hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+->
+head <--+-P |<--------+-P |
+        +---+         +---+
+                 2
+               +---+
+               | N-+---->
+          <----+-P |
+               +---+
+
+Because we didn't wait for a grace period, there may be a concurrent lookup
+still at 2. Now when it follows 2's 'next' pointer, it will walk off into
+another list without ever having checked object 3.
+
+A related, but distinctly different, issue is that of rename atomicity versus
+lookup operations. If a file is renamed from 'A' to 'B', a lookup must only
+find either 'A' or 'B'. So if a lookup of 'A' returns NULL, a subsequent lookup
+of 'B' must succeed (note the reverse is not true).
+
+Between deleting the dentry from the old hash list, and inserting it on the new
+hash list, a lookup may find neither 'A' nor 'B' matching the dentry. The same
+rename seqlock is also used to cover this race in much the same way, by
+retrying a negative lookup result if a rename was in progress.
+
+Seqcount based lookups
+----------------------
+In refcount based dcache lookups, d_lock is used to serialise access to
+the dentry, stabilising it while comparing its name and parent and then
+taking a reference count (the reference count then gives a stable place to
+start the next part of the path walk from).
+
+As explained above, we would like to do path walking without taking locks or
+reference counts on intermediate dentries along the path. To do this, a per
+dentry seqlock (d_seq) is used to take a "coherent snapshot" of what the dentry
+looks like (its name, parent, and inode). That snapshot is then used to start
+the next part of the path walk. When loading the coherent snapshot under d_seq,
+care must be taken to load the members up-front, and use those pointers rather
+than reloading from the dentry later on (otherwise we'd have interesting things
+like d_inode going NULL underneath us, if the name was unlinked).
+
+Also important is to avoid performing any destructive operations (pretty much:
+no non-atomic stores to shared data), and to recheck the seqcount when we are
+"done" with the operation. Retry or abort if the seqcount does not match.
+Avoiding destructive or changing operations means we can easily unwind from
+failure.
+
+What this means is that a caller, provided they are holding RCU lock to
+protect the dentry object from disappearing, can perform a seqcount based
+lookup which does not increment the refcount on the dentry or write to
+it in any way. This returned dentry can be used for subsequent operations,
+provided that d_seq is rechecked after that operation is complete.
+
+Inodes are also rcu freed, so the seqcount lookup dentry's inode may also be
+queried for permissions.
+
+With this two parts of the puzzle, we can do path lookups without taking
+locks or refcounts on dentry elements.
+
+RCU-walk path walking design
+============================
+
+Path walking code now has two distinct modes, ref-walk and rcu-walk. ref-walk
+is the traditional[*] way of performing dcache lookups using d_lock to
+serialise concurrent modifications to the dentry and take a reference count on
+it. ref-walk is simple and obvious, and may sleep, take locks, etc while path
+walking is operating on each dentry. rcu-walk uses seqcount based dentry
+lookups, and can perform lookup of intermediate elements without any stores to
+shared data in the dentry or inode. rcu-walk can not be applied to all cases,
+eg. if the filesystem must sleep or perform non trivial operations, rcu-walk
+must be switched to ref-walk mode.
+
+[*] RCU is still used for the dentry hash lookup in ref-walk, but not the full
+    path walk.
+
+Where ref-walk uses a stable, refcounted ``parent'' to walk the remaining
+path string, rcu-walk uses a d_seq protected snapshot. When looking up a
+child of this parent snapshot, we open d_seq critical section on the child
+before closing d_seq critical section on the parent. This gives an interlocking
+ladder of snapshots to walk down.
+
+
+     proc 101
+      /----------------\
+     / comm:    "vi"    \
+    /  fs.root: dentry0  \
+    \  fs.cwd:  dentry2  /
+     \                  /
+      \----------------/
+
+So when vi wants to open("/home/npiggin/test.c", O_RDWR), then it will
+start from current->fs->root, which is a pinned dentry. Alternatively,
+"./test.c" would start from cwd; both names refer to the same path in
+the context of proc101.
+
+     dentry 0
+    +---------------------+   rcu-walk begins here, we note d_seq, check the
+    | name:    "/"        |   inode's permission, and then look up the next
+    | inode:   10         |   path element which is "home"...
+    | children:"home", ...|
+    +---------------------+
+              |
+     dentry 1 V
+    +---------------------+   ... which brings us here. We find dentry1 via
+    | name:    "home"     |   hash lookup, then note d_seq and compare name
+    | inode:   678        |   string and parent pointer. When we have a match,
+    | children:"npiggin"  |   we now recheck the d_seq of dentry0. Then we
+    +---------------------+   check inode and look up the next element.
+              |
+     dentry2  V
+    +---------------------+   Note: if dentry0 is now modified, lookup is
+    | name:    "npiggin"  |   not necessarily invalid, so we need only keep a
+    | inode:   543        |   parent for d_seq verification, and grandparents
+    | children:"a.c", ... |   can be forgotten.
+    +---------------------+
+              |
+     dentry3  V
+    +---------------------+   At this point we have our destination dentry.
+    | name:    "a.c"      |   We now take its d_lock, verify d_seq of this
+    | inode:   14221      |   dentry. If that checks out, we can increment
+    | children:NULL       |   its refcount because we're holding d_lock.
+    +---------------------+
+
+Taking a refcount on a dentry from rcu-walk mode, by taking its d_lock,
+re-checking its d_seq, and then incrementing its refcount is called
+"dropping rcu" or dropping from rcu-walk into ref-walk mode.
+
+It is, in some sense, a bit of a house of cards. If the seqcount check of the
+parent snapshot fails, the house comes down, because we had closed the d_seq
+section on the grandparent, so we have nothing left to stand on. In that case,
+the path walk must be fully restarted (which we do in ref-walk mode, to avoid
+live locks). It is costly to have a full restart, but fortunately they are
+quite rare.
+
+When we reach a point where sleeping is required, or a filesystem callout
+requires ref-walk, then instead of restarting the walk, we attempt to drop rcu
+at the last known good dentry we have. Avoiding a full restart in ref-walk in
+these cases is fundamental for performance and scalability because blocking
+operations such as creates and unlinks are not uncommon.
+
+The detailed design for rcu-walk is like this:
+* LOOKUP_RCU is set in nd->flags, which distinguishes rcu-walk from ref-walk.
+* Take the RCU lock for the entire path walk, starting with the acquiring
+  of the starting path (eg. root/cwd/fd-path). So now dentry refcounts are
+  not required for dentry persistence.
+* synchronize_rcu is called when unregistering a filesystem, so we can
+  access d_ops and i_ops during rcu-walk.
+* Similarly take the vfsmount lock for the entire path walk. So now mnt
+  refcounts are not required for persistence. Also we are free to perform mount
+  lookups, and to assume dentry mount points and mount roots are stable up and
+  down the path.
+* Have a per-dentry seqlock to protect the dentry name, parent, and inode,
+  so we can load this tuple atomically, and also check whether any of its
+  members have changed.
+* Dentry lookups (based on parent, candidate string tuple) recheck the parent
+  sequence after the child is found in case anything changed in the parent
+  during the path walk.
+* inode is also RCU protected so we can load d_inode and use the inode for
+  limited things.
+* i_mode, i_uid, i_gid can be tested for exec permissions during path walk.
+* i_op can be loaded.
+* When the destination dentry is reached, drop rcu there (ie. take d_lock,
+  verify d_seq, increment refcount).
+* If seqlock verification fails anywhere along the path, do a full restart
+  of the path lookup in ref-walk mode. -ECHILD tends to be used (for want of
+  a better errno) to signal an rcu-walk failure.
+
+The cases where rcu-walk cannot continue are:
+* NULL dentry (ie. any uncached path element)
+* Following links
+
+It may be possible eventually to make following links rcu-walk aware.
+
+Uncached path elements will always require dropping to ref-walk mode, at the
+very least because i_mutex needs to be grabbed, and objects allocated.
+
+Final note:
+"store-free" path walking is not strictly store free. We take vfsmount lock
+and refcounts (both of which can be made per-cpu), and we also store to the
+stack (which is essentially CPU-local), and we also have to take locks and
+refcount on final dentry.
+
+The point is that shared data, where practically possible, is not locked
+or stored into. The result is massive improvements in performance and
+scalability of path resolution.
+
+
+Interesting statistics
+======================
+
+The following table gives rcu lookup statistics for a few simple workloads
+(2s12c24t Westmere, debian non-graphical system). Ungraceful are attempts to
+drop rcu that fail due to d_seq failure and requiring the entire path lookup
+again. Other cases are successful rcu-drops that are required before the final
+element, nodentry for missing dentry, revalidate for filesystem revalidate
+routine requiring rcu drop, permission for permission check requiring drop,
+and link for symlink traversal requiring drop.
+
+     rcu-lookups     restart  nodentry          link  revalidate  permission
+bootup     47121           0      4624          1010       10283        7852
+dbench  25386793           0   6778659(26.7%)     55         549        1156
+kbuild   2696672          10     64442(2.3%)  108764(4.0%)     1        1590
+git diff   39605           0        28             2           0         106
+vfstest 24185492        4945    708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%)     0        2651
+
+What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted
+entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which
+specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to excercise
+such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts.
+
+Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where
+the reference count needs to be taken for some reason. This is either because
+we have reached the target of the path walk, or because we have encountered a
+condition that can't be resolved in rcu-walk mode.  Ideally, we drop rcu-walk
+only when we have reached the target dentry, so the other statistics show where
+this does not happen.
+
+Note that a graceful drop from rcu-walk mode due to something such as the
+dentry not existing (which can be common) is not necessarily a failure of
+rcu-walk scheme, because some elements of the path may have been walked in
+rcu-walk mode. The further we get from common path elements (such as cwd or
+root), the less contended the dentry is likely to be. The closer we are to
+common path elements, the more likely they will exist in dentry cache.
+
+
+Papers and other documentation on dcache locking
+================================================
+
+1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124).
+
+2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html
+
+

Documentation/filesystems/porting

@@ -216,7 +216,6 @@ had ->revalidate()) add calls in ->follow_link()/->readlink().
 ->d_parent changes are not protected by BKL anymore.  Read access is safe
 if at least one of the following is true:
 	* filesystem has no cross-directory rename()
-	* dcache_lock is held
 	* we know that parent had been locked (e.g. we are looking at
 ->d_parent of ->lookup() argument).
 	* we are called from ->rename().
@@ -318,3 +317,71 @@ if it's zero is not *and* *never* *had* *been* enough.  Final unlink() and iput(
 may happen while the inode is in the middle of ->write_inode(); e.g. if you blindly
 free the on-disk inode, you may end up doing that while ->write_inode() is writing
 to it.
+
+---
+[mandatory]
+
+	.d_delete() now only advises the dcache as to whether or not to cache
+unreferenced dentries, and is now only called when the dentry refcount goes to
+0. Even on 0 refcount transition, it must be able to tolerate being called 0,
+1, or more times (eg. constant, idempotent).
+
+---
+[mandatory]
+
+	.d_compare() calling convention and locking rules are significantly
+changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and
+look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance.
+
+---
+[mandatory]
+
+	.d_hash() calling convention and locking rules are significantly
+changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and
+look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance.
+
+---
+[mandatory]
+	dcache_lock is gone, replaced by fine grained locks. See fs/dcache.c
+for details of what locks to replace dcache_lock with in order to protect
+particular things. Most of the time, a filesystem only needs ->d_lock, which
+protects *all* the dcache state of a given dentry.
+
+--
+[mandatory]
+
+	Filesystems must RCU-free their inodes, if they can have been accessed
+via rcu-walk path walk (basically, if the file can have had a path name in the
+vfs namespace).
+
+	i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, and the vfs expects
+i_dentry to be reinitialized before it is freed, so an:
+
+  INIT_LIST_HEAD(&inode->i_dentry);
+
+must be done in the RCU callback.
+
+--
+[recommended]
+	vfs now tries to do path walking in "rcu-walk mode", which avoids
+atomic operations and scalability hazards on dentries and inodes (see
+Documentation/filesystems/path-walk.txt). d_hash and d_compare changes (above)
+are examples of the changes required to support this. For more complex
+filesystem callbacks, the vfs drops out of rcu-walk mode before the fs call, so
+no changes are required to the filesystem. However, this is costly and loses
+the benefits of rcu-walk mode. We will begin to add filesystem callbacks that
+are rcu-walk aware, shown below. Filesystems should take advantage of this
+where possible.
+
+--
+[mandatory]
+	d_revalidate is a callback that is made on every path element (if
+the filesystem provides it), which requires dropping out of rcu-walk mode. This
+may now be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). -ECHILD should be
+returned if the filesystem cannot handle rcu-walk. See
+Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details.
+
+	permission and check_acl are inode permission checks that are called
+on many or all directory inodes on the way down a path walk (to check for
+exec permission). These must now be rcu-walk aware (flags & IPERM_RCU). See
+Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details.

Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt

@@ -1181,6 +1181,30 @@ Table 1-12: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname>
  mb_groups       details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
 ..............................................................................
 
+2.0 /proc/consoles
+------------------
+Shows registered system console lines.
+
+To see which character device lines are currently used for the system console
+/dev/console, you may simply look into the file /proc/consoles:
+
+  > cat /proc/consoles
+  tty0                 -WU (ECp)       4:7
+  ttyS0                -W- (Ep)        4:64
+
+The columns are:
+
+  device               name of the device
+  operations           R = can do read operations
+                       W = can do write operations
+                       U = can do unblank
+  flags                E = it is enabled
+                       C = it is prefered console
+                       B = it is primary boot console
+                       p = it is used for printk buffer
+                       b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device
+                       a = it is safe to use when cpu is offline
+  major:minor          major and minor number of the device separated by a colon
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Summary

Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt

@@ -325,7 +325,8 @@ struct inode_operations {
         void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
         void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *);
 	void (*truncate) (struct inode *);
-	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *);
+	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int);
+	int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int);
 	int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *);
 	int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *mnt, struct dentry *, struct kstat *);
 	int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int);
@@ -414,6 +415,13 @@ otherwise noted.
   permission: called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like
   	filesystem.
 
+	May be called in rcu-walk mode (flags & IPERM_RCU). If in rcu-walk
+	mode, the filesystem must check the permission without blocking or
+	storing to the inode.
+
+	If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return
+	-ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode.
+
   setattr: called by the VFS to set attributes for a file. This method
   	is called by chmod(2) and related system calls.
 
@@ -847,9 +855,12 @@ defined:
 
 struct dentry_operations {
 	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
-	int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *);
-	int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *);
-	int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *);
+	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+			struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+			const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+			unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_delete)(const struct dentry *);
 	void (*d_release)(struct dentry *);
 	void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *);
 	char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int);
@@ -860,13 +871,45 @@ struct dentry_operations {
 	dcache. Most filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their
 	dentries in the dcache are valid
 
-  d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table
+	d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU).
+	If in rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must revalidate the dentry without
+	blocking or storing to the dentry, d_parent and d_inode should not be
+	used without care (because they can go NULL), instead nd->inode should
+	be used.
+
+	If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return
+	-ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode.
+
+  d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table. The first
+	dentry passed to d_hash is the parent directory that the name is
+	to be hashed into. The inode is the dentry's inode.
+
+	Same locking and synchronisation rules as d_compare regarding
+	what is safe to dereference etc.
+
+  d_compare: called to compare a dentry name with a given name. The first
+	dentry is the parent of the dentry to be compared, the second is
+	the parent's inode, then the dentry and inode (may be NULL) of the
+	child dentry. len and name string are properties of the dentry to be
+	compared. qstr is the name to compare it with.
+
+	Must be constant and idempotent, and should not take locks if
+	possible, and should not or store into the dentry or inodes.
+	Should not dereference pointers outside the dentry or inodes without
+	lots of care (eg.  d_parent, d_inode, d_name should not be used).
+
+	However, our vfsmount is pinned, and RCU held, so the dentries and
+	inodes won't disappear, neither will our sb or filesystem module.
+	->i_sb and ->d_sb may be used.
 
-  d_compare: called when a dentry should be compared with another
+	It is a tricky calling convention because it needs to be called under
+	"rcu-walk", ie. without any locks or references on things.
 
-  d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is
-	deleted. This means no-one is using the dentry, however it is
-	still valid and in the dcache
+  d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is dropped and the
+	dcache is deciding whether or not to cache it. Return 1 to delete
+	immediately, or 0 to cache the dentry. Default is NULL which means to
+	always cache a reachable dentry. d_delete must be constant and
+	idempotent.
 
   d_release: called when a dentry is really deallocated
 
@@ -910,14 +953,11 @@ manipulate dentries:
 	the usage count)
 
   dput: close a handle for a dentry (decrements the usage count). If
-	the usage count drops to 0, the "d_delete" method is called
-	and the dentry is placed on the unused list if the dentry is
-	still in its parents hash list. Putting the dentry on the
-	unused list just means that if the system needs some RAM, it
-	goes through the unused list of dentries and deallocates them.
-	If the dentry has already been unhashed and the usage count
-	drops to 0, in this case the dentry is deallocated after the
-	"d_delete" method is called
+	the usage count drops to 0, and the dentry is still in its
+	parent's hash, the "d_delete" method is called to check whether
+	it should be cached. If it should not be cached, or if the dentry
+	is not hashed, it is deleted. Otherwise cached dentries are put
+	into an LRU list to be reclaimed on memory shortage.
 
   d_drop: this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list. A
 	subsequent call to dput() will deallocate the dentry if its

Documentation/hwmon/ds620

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Kernel driver ds620
+===================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Dallas Semiconductor DS620
+    Prefix: 'ds620'
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
+               http://www.dalsemi.com/
+
+Authors:
+        Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de>
+        based on ds1621.c by
+        Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The DS620 is a (one instance) digital thermometer and thermostat. It has both
+high and low temperature limits which can be user defined (i.e.  programmed
+into non-volatile on-chip registers). Temperature range is -55 degree Celsius
+to +125. Between 0 and 70 degree Celsius, accuracy is 0.5 Kelvin. The value
+returned via sysfs displays post decimal positions.
+
+The thermostat function works as follows: When configured via platform_data
+(struct ds620_platform_data) .pomode == 0 (default), the thermostat output pin
+PO is always low. If .pomode == 1, the thermostat is in PO_LOW mode. I.e., the
+output pin PO becomes active when the temperature falls below temp1_min and
+stays active until the temperature goes above temp1_max.
+
+Likewise, with .pomode == 2, the thermostat is in PO_HIGH mode. I.e., the PO
+output pin becomes active when the temperature goes above temp1_max and stays
+active until the temperature falls below temp1_min.
+
+The PO output pin of the DS620 operates active-low.

Documentation/hwmon/sht21

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Kernel driver sht21
+===================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Sensirion SHT21
+    Prefix: 'sht21'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website
+    http://www.sensirion.com/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT21.pdf
+
+  * Sensirion SHT25
+    Prefix: 'sht21'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website
+    http://www.sensirion.com/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT25.pdf
+
+Author:
+  Urs Fleisch <urs.fleisch@sensirion.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The SHT21 and SHT25 are humidity and temperature sensors in a DFN package of
+only 3 x 3 mm footprint and 1.1 mm height. The difference between the two
+devices is the higher level of precision of the SHT25 (1.8% relative humidity,
+0.2 degree Celsius) compared with the SHT21 (2.0% relative humidity,
+0.3 degree Celsius).
+
+The devices communicate with the I2C protocol. All sensors are set to the same
+I2C address 0x40, so an entry with I2C_BOARD_INFO("sht21", 0x40) can be used
+in the board setup code.
+
+sysfs-Interface
+---------------
+
+temp1_input - temperature input
+humidity1_input - humidity input
+
+Notes
+-----
+
+The driver uses the default resolution settings of 12 bit for humidity and 14
+bit for temperature, which results in typical measurement times of 22 ms for
+humidity and 66 ms for temperature. To keep self heating below 0.1 degree
+Celsius, the device should not be active for more than 10% of the time,
+e.g. maximum two measurements per second at the given resolution.
+
+Different resolutions, the on-chip heater, using the CRC checksum and reading
+the serial number are not supported yet.

Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface

@@ -384,10 +384,20 @@ curr[1-*]_min	Current min value.
 		Unit: milliampere
 		RW
 
+curr[1-*]_lcrit	Current critical low value
+		Unit: milliampere
+		RW
+
+curr[1-*]_crit	Current critical high value.
+		Unit: milliampere
+		RW
+
 curr[1-*]_input	Current input value
 		Unit: milliampere
 		RO
 
+Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with currents.
+
 *********
 * Power *
 *********
@@ -450,13 +460,6 @@ power[1-*]_accuracy		Accuracy of the power meter.
 				Unit: Percent
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_alarm		1 if the system is drawing more power than the
-				cap allows; 0 otherwise.  A poll notification is
-				sent to this file when the power use exceeds the
-				cap.  This file only appears if the cap is known
-				to be enforced by hardware.
-				RO
-
 power[1-*]_cap			If power use rises above this limit, the
 				system should take action to reduce power use.
 				A poll notification is sent to this file if the
@@ -479,6 +482,20 @@ power[1-*]_cap_min		Minimum cap that can be set.
 				Unit: microWatt
 				RO
 
+power[1-*]_max			Maximum power.
+				Unit: microWatt
+				RW
+
+power[1-*]_crit			Critical maximum power.
+				If power rises to or above this limit, the
+				system is expected take drastic action to reduce
+				power consumption, such as a system shutdown or
+				a forced powerdown of some devices.
+				Unit: microWatt
+				RW
+
+Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with power readings.
+
 **********
 * Energy *
 **********
@@ -488,6 +505,15 @@ energy[1-*]_input		Cumulative energy use
 				RO
 
 
+************
+* Humidity *
+************
+
+humidity[1-*]_input		Humidity
+				Unit: milli-percent (per cent mille, pcm)
+				RO
+
+
 **********
 * Alarms *
 **********
@@ -501,6 +527,7 @@ implementation.
 
 in[0-*]_alarm
 curr[1-*]_alarm
+power[1-*]_alarm
 fan[1-*]_alarm
 temp[1-*]_alarm
 		Channel alarm
@@ -512,12 +539,20 @@ OR
 
 in[0-*]_min_alarm
 in[0-*]_max_alarm
+in[0-*]_lcrit_alarm
+in[0-*]_crit_alarm
 curr[1-*]_min_alarm
 curr[1-*]_max_alarm
+curr[1-*]_lcrit_alarm
+curr[1-*]_crit_alarm
+power[1-*]_cap_alarm
+power[1-*]_max_alarm
+power[1-*]_crit_alarm
 fan[1-*]_min_alarm
 fan[1-*]_max_alarm
 temp[1-*]_min_alarm
 temp[1-*]_max_alarm
+temp[1-*]_lcrit_alarm
 temp[1-*]_crit_alarm
 temp[1-*]_emergency_alarm
 		Limit alarm

Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux

@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Kernel driver gpio-i2cmux
+
+Author: Peter Korsgaard <peter.korsgaard@barco.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+gpio-i2cmux is an i2c mux driver providing access to I2C bus segments
+from a master I2C bus and a hardware MUX controlled through GPIO pins.
+
+E.G.:
+
+  ----------              ----------  Bus segment 1   - - - - -
+ |          | SCL/SDA    |          |-------------- |           |
+ |          |------------|          |
+ |          |            |          | Bus segment 2 |           |
+ |  Linux   | GPIO 1..N  |   MUX    |---------------   Devices
+ |          |------------|          |               |           |
+ |          |            |          | Bus segment M
+ |          |            |          |---------------|           |
+  ----------              ----------                  - - - - -
+
+SCL/SDA of the master I2C bus is multiplexed to bus segment 1..M
+according to the settings of the GPIO pins 1..N.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+gpio-i2cmux uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct
+platform_device with the platform_data pointing to a struct
+gpio_i2cmux_platform_data with the I2C adapter number of the master
+bus, the number of bus segments to create and the GPIO pins used
+to control it. See include/linux/gpio-i2cmux.h for details.
+
+E.G. something like this for a MUX providing 4 bus segments
+controlled through 3 GPIO pins:
+
+#include <linux/gpio-i2cmux.h>
+#include <linux/platform_device.h>
+
+static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_gpios[] = {
+	AT91_PIN_PC26, AT91_PIN_PC25, AT91_PIN_PC24
+};
+
+static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_values[] = {
+	0, 1, 2, 3
+};
+
+static struct gpio_i2cmux_platform_data myboard_i2cmux_data = {
+	.parent		= 1,
+	.base_nr	= 2, /* optional */
+	.values		= myboard_gpiomux_values,
+	.n_values	= ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_values),
+	.gpios		= myboard_gpiomux_gpios,
+	.n_gpios	= ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_gpios),
+	.idle		= 4, /* optional */
+};
+
+static struct platform_device myboard_i2cmux = {
+	.name		= "gpio-i2cmux",
+	.id		= 0,
+	.dev		= {
+		.platform_data	= &myboard_i2cmux_data,
+	},
+};

Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+Kernel driver for CMA3000-D0x
+============================
+
+Supported chips:
+* VTI CMA3000-D0x
+Datasheet:
+  CMA3000-D0X Product Family Specification 8281000A.02.pdf
+  <http://www.vti.fi/en/>
+
+Author: Hemanth V <hemanthv@ti.com>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+CMA3000 Tri-axis accelerometer supports Motion detect, Measurement and
+Free fall modes.
+
+Motion Detect Mode: Its the low power mode where interrupts are generated only
+when motion exceeds the defined thresholds.
+
+Measurement Mode: This mode is used to read the acceleration data on X,Y,Z
+axis and supports 400, 100, 40 Hz sample frequency.
+
+Free fall Mode: This mode is intended to save system resources.
+
+Threshold values: Chip supports defining threshold values for above modes
+which includes time and g value. Refer product specifications for more details.
+
+CMA3000 chip supports mutually exclusive I2C and SPI interfaces for
+communication, currently the driver supports I2C based communication only.
+Initial configuration for bus mode is set in non volatile memory and can later
+be modified through bus interface command.
+
+Driver reports acceleration data through input subsystem. It generates ABS_MISC
+event with value 1 when free fall is detected.
+
+Platform data need to be configured for initial default values.
+
+Platform Data
+-------------
+fuzz_x: Noise on X Axis
+
+fuzz_y: Noise on Y Axis
+
+fuzz_z: Noise on Z Axis
+
+g_range: G range in milli g i.e 2000 or 8000
+
+mode: Default Operating mode
+
+mdthr: Motion detect g range threshold value
+
+mdfftmr: Motion detect and free fall time threshold value
+
+ffthr: Free fall g range threshold value
+
+Input Interface
+--------------
+Input driver version is 1.0.0
+Input device ID: bus 0x18 vendor 0x0 product 0x0 version 0x0
+Input device name: "cma3000-accelerometer"
+Supported events:
+  Event type 0 (Sync)
+  Event type 3 (Absolute)
+    Event code 0 (X)
+      Value     47
+      Min    -8000
+      Max     8000
+      Fuzz     200
+    Event code 1 (Y)
+      Value    -28
+      Min    -8000
+      Max     8000
+      Fuzz     200
+    Event code 2 (Z)
+      Value    905
+      Min    -8000
+      Max     8000
+      Fuzz     200
+    Event code 40 (Misc)
+      Value      0
+      Min        0
+      Max        1
+  Event type 4 (Misc)
+
+
+Register/Platform parameters Description
+----------------------------------------
+
+mode:
+	0: power down mode
+	1: 100 Hz Measurement mode
+	2: 400 Hz Measurement mode
+	3: 40 Hz Measurement mode
+	4: Motion Detect mode (default)
+	5: 100 Hz Free fall mode
+	6: 40 Hz Free fall mode
+	7: Power off mode
+
+grange:
+	2000: 2000 mg or 2G Range
+	8000: 8000 mg or 8G Range
+
+mdthr:
+	X: X * 71mg (8G Range)
+	X: X * 18mg (2G Range)
+
+mdfftmr:
+	X: (X & 0x70) * 100 ms (MDTMR)
+	   (X & 0x0F) * 2.5 ms (FFTMR 400 Hz)
+	   (X & 0x0F) * 10 ms  (FFTMR 100 Hz)
+
+ffthr:
+       X: (X >> 2) * 18mg (2G Range)
+       X: (X & 0x0F) * 71 mg (8G Range)

Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Multi-touch (MT) Protocol
 -------------------------
-	Copyright (C) 2009	Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se>
+	Copyright (C) 2009-2010	Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se>
 
 
 Introduction
@@ -161,19 +161,24 @@ against the glass. The inner region will increase, and in general, the
 ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR, which is always smaller than
 unity, is related to the contact pressure. For pressure-based devices,
 ABS_MT_PRESSURE may be used to provide the pressure on the contact area
-instead.
+instead. Devices capable of contact hovering can use ABS_MT_DISTANCE to
+indicate the distance between the contact and the surface.
 
 In addition to the MAJOR parameters, the oval shape of the contact can be
 described by adding the MINOR parameters, such that MAJOR and MINOR are the
 major and minor axis of an ellipse. Finally, the orientation of the oval
 shape can be describe with the ORIENTATION parameter.
 
+For type A devices, further specification of the touch shape is possible
+via ABS_MT_BLOB_ID.
+
 The ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE may be used to specify whether the touching tool is a
-contact or a pen or something else.  Devices with more granular information
-may specify general shapes as blobs, i.e., as a sequence of rectangular
-shapes grouped together by an ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. Finally, for the few devices
-that currently support it, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event may be used to
-report contact tracking from hardware [5].
+finger or a pen or something else. Finally, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event
+may be used to track identified contacts over time [5].
+
+In the type B protocol, ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE and ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID are
+implicitly handled by input core; drivers should instead call
+input_mt_report_slot_state().
 
 
 Event Semantics
@@ -213,6 +218,12 @@ The pressure, in arbitrary units, on the contact area. May be used instead
 of TOUCH and WIDTH for pressure-based devices or any device with a spatial
 signal intensity distribution.
 
+ABS_MT_DISTANCE
+
+The distance, in surface units, between the contact and the surface. Zero
+distance means the contact is touching the surface. A positive number means
+the contact is hovering above the surface.
+
 ABS_MT_ORIENTATION
 
 The orientation of the ellipse. The value should describe a signed quarter
@@ -240,21 +251,24 @@ ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE
 The type of approaching tool. A lot of kernel drivers cannot distinguish
 between different tool types, such as a finger or a pen. In such cases, the
 event should be omitted. The protocol currently supports MT_TOOL_FINGER and
-MT_TOOL_PEN [2].
+MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core;
+drivers should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state().
 
 ABS_MT_BLOB_ID
 
 The BLOB_ID groups several packets together into one arbitrarily shaped
-contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and
+contact. The sequence of points forms a polygon which defines the shape of
+the contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and
 should not be confused with the high-level trackingID [5]. Most type A
 devices do not have blob capability, so drivers can safely omit this event.
 
 ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID
 
 The TRACKING_ID identifies an initiated contact throughout its life cycle
-[5]. This event is mandatory for type B devices. The value range of the
-TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure unique identification of a
-contact maintained over an extended period of time.
+[5]. The value range of the TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure
+unique identification of a contact maintained over an extended period of
+time. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; drivers
+should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state().
 
 
 Event Computation
@@ -301,18 +315,19 @@ and with ORIENTATION, one can detect twisting of fingers.
 Notes
 -----
 
-In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data
-reported in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch
-events. In addition, all finger data must bypass input filtering,
-since subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers.
+In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data reported
+in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch events.
+
+For type A devices, all finger data bypasses input filtering, since
+subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers.
 
-The first kernel driver to utilize the MT protocol is the bcm5974 driver,
-where examples can be found.
+For example usage of the type A protocol, see the bcm5974 driver. For
+example usage of the type B protocol, see the hid-egalax driver.
 
 [1] With the extension ABS_MT_APPROACH_X and ABS_MT_APPROACH_Y, the
 difference between the contact position and the approaching tool position
 could be used to derive tilt.
 [2] The list can of course be extended.
-[3] Multitouch X driver project: http://bitmath.org/code/multitouch/.
+[3] The mtdev project: http://bitmath.org/code/mtdev/.
 [4] See the section on event computation.
 [5] See the section on finger tracking.

Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt

@@ -155,7 +155,6 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'Q'	all	linux/soundcard.h
 'R'	00-1F	linux/random.h		conflict!
 'R'	01	linux/rfkill.h		conflict!
-'R'	01-0F	media/rds.h		conflict!
 'R'	C0-DF	net/bluetooth/rfcomm.h
 'S'	all	linux/cdrom.h		conflict!
 'S'	80-81	scsi/scsi_ioctl.h	conflict!
@@ -194,7 +193,6 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 					<http://lrcwww.epfl.ch/>
 'b'	00-FF				conflict! bit3 vme host bridge
 					<mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl>
-'b'	00-0F	media/bt819.h		conflict!
 'c'	all	linux/cm4000_cs.h	conflict!
 'c'	00-7F	linux/comstats.h	conflict!
 'c'	00-7F	linux/coda.h		conflict!
@@ -260,14 +258,11 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 't'	80-8F	linux/isdn_ppp.h
 't'	90	linux/toshiba.h
 'u'	00-1F	linux/smb_fs.h		gone
-'v'	all	linux/videodev.h	conflict!
 'v'	00-1F	linux/ext2_fs.h		conflict!
 'v'	00-1F	linux/fs.h		conflict!
 'v'	00-0F	linux/sonypi.h		conflict!
-'v'	C0-CF	drivers/media/video/ov511.h	conflict!
 'v'	C0-DF	media/pwc-ioctl.h	conflict!
 'v'	C0-FF	linux/meye.h		conflict!
-'v'	C0-CF	drivers/media/video/zoran/zoran.h	conflict!
 'v'	D0-DF	drivers/media/video/cpia2/cpia2dev.h	conflict!
 'w'	all				CERN SCI driver
 'y'	00-1F				packet based user level communications
@@ -278,7 +273,6 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 					<mailto:oe@port.de>
 'z'	10-4F	drivers/s390/crypto/zcrypt_api.h	conflict!
 0x80	00-1F	linux/fb.h
-0x88	00-3F	media/ovcamchip.h
 0x89	00-06	arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h
 0x89	0B-DF	linux/sockios.h
 0x89	E0-EF	linux/sockios.h		SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range

Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt

@@ -73,6 +73,14 @@ Specify the output directory when building the kernel.
 The output directory can also be specified using "O=...".
 Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT.
 
+KBUILD_DEBARCH
+--------------------------------------------------
+For the deb-pkg target, allows overriding the normal heuristics deployed by
+deb-pkg. Normally deb-pkg attempts to guess the right architecture based on
+the UTS_MACHINE variable, and on some architectures also the kernel config.
+The value of KBUILD_DEBARCH is assumed (not checked) to be a valid Debian
+architecture.
+
 ARCH
 --------------------------------------------------
 Set ARCH to the architecture to be built.

Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt

@@ -112,7 +112,6 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
 	(no prompts anywhere) and for symbols with no dependencies.
 	That will limit the usefulness but on the other hand avoid
 	the illegal configurations all over.
-	kconfig should one day warn about such things.
 
 - numerical ranges: "range" <symbol> <symbol> ["if" <expr>]
   This allows to limit the range of possible input values for int
@@ -268,7 +267,7 @@ separate list of options.
 
 choices:
 
-	"choice"
+	"choice" [symbol]
 	<choice options>
 	<choice block>
 	"endchoice"
@@ -282,6 +281,10 @@ single driver can be compiled/loaded into the kernel, but all drivers
 can be compiled as modules.
 A choice accepts another option "optional", which allows to set the
 choice to 'n' and no entry needs to be selected.
+If no [symbol] is associated with a choice, then you can not have multiple
+definitions of that choice. If a [symbol] is associated to the choice,
+then you may define the same choice (ie. with the same entries) in another
+place.
 
 comment:
 

Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt

@@ -1136,6 +1136,21 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
 	      resulting in the target file being recompiled for no
 	      obvious reason.
 
+    dtc
+	Create flattend device tree blob object suitable for linking
+	into vmlinux. Device tree blobs linked into vmlinux are placed
+	in an init section in the image. Platform code *must* copy the
+	blob to non-init memory prior to calling unflatten_device_tree().
+
+	Example:
+		#arch/x86/platform/ce4100/Makefile
+		clean-files := *dtb.S
+
+		DTC_FLAGS := -p 1024
+		obj-y += foo.dtb.o
+
+		$(obj)/%.dtb: $(src)/%.dts
+			$(call cmd,dtc)
 
 --- 6.7 Custom kbuild commands
 

Documentation/kernel-docs.txt

@@ -537,7 +537,7 @@
        Notes: Further information in
        http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/linuxdrive2/
 
-     * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3nd Edition"
+     * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition"
        Authors: Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman
        Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates.
        Date: 2005.
@@ -592,14 +592,6 @@
        Pages: 600.
        ISBN: 0-13-101908-2
 
-     * Title:  "The  Design  and Implementation of the 4.4 BSD UNIX
-       Operating System"
-       Author: Marshall Kirk McKusick, Keith Bostic, Michael J. Karels,
-       John S. Quarterman.
-       Publisher: Addison-Wesley.
-       Date: 1996.
-       ISBN: 0-201-54979-4
-
      * Title: "Programming for the real world - POSIX.4"
        Author: Bill O. Gallmeister.
        Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates, Inc..
@@ -610,28 +602,13 @@
        POSIX. Good reference.
 
      * Title:  "UNIX  Systems  for  Modern Architectures: Symmetric
-       Multiprocesssing and Caching for Kernel Programmers"
+       Multiprocessing and Caching for Kernel Programmers"
        Author: Curt Schimmel.
        Publisher: Addison Wesley.
        Date: June, 1994.
        Pages: 432.
        ISBN: 0-201-63338-8
 
-     * Title:  "The  Design  and Implementation of the 4.3 BSD UNIX
-       Operating System"
-       Author: Samuel J. Leffler, Marshall Kirk McKusick, Michael J.
-       Karels, John S. Quarterman.
-       Publisher: Addison-Wesley.
-       Date: 1989 (reprinted with corrections on October, 1990).
-       ISBN: 0-201-06196-1
-
-     * Title: "The Design of the UNIX Operating System"
-       Author: Maurice J. Bach.
-       Publisher: Prentice Hall.
-       Date: 1986.
-       Pages: 471.
-       ISBN: 0-13-201757-1
-
      MISCELLANEOUS:
 
      * Name: linux/Documentation

Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -403,6 +403,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	bttv.pll=	See Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options
 	bttv.tuner=	and Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CARDLIST
 
+	bulk_remove=off	[PPC]  This parameter disables the use of the pSeries
+			firmware feature for flushing multiple hpte entries
+			at a time.
+
 	c101=		[NET] Moxa C101 synchronous serial card
 
 	cachesize=	[BUGS=X86-32] Override level 2 CPU cache size detection.
@@ -1490,6 +1494,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	mtdparts=	[MTD]
 			See drivers/mtd/cmdlinepart.c.
 
+	multitce=off	[PPC]  This parameter disables the use of the pSeries
+			firmware feature for updating multiple TCE entries
+			at a time.
+
 	onenand.bdry=	[HW,MTD] Flex-OneNAND Boundary Configuration
 
 			Format: [die0_boundary][,die0_lock][,die1_boundary][,die1_lock]
@@ -1579,20 +1587,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	nmi_watchdog=	[KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels
 			Format: [panic,][num]
-			Valid num: 0,1,2
+			Valid num: 0
 			0 - turn nmi_watchdog off
-			1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog
-			2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using
-			a performance counter. Note: This will use one
-			performance counter and the local APIC's performance
-			vector.
 			When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog
 			timeout occurs.
 			This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and
 			need the box quickly up again.
-			Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following
-			symbolic names: lapic and ioapic
-			Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic
 
 	netpoll.carrier_timeout=
 			[NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that
@@ -1622,6 +1622,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	noapic		[SMP,APIC] Tells the kernel to not make use of any
 			IOAPICs that may be present in the system.
 
+	noautogroup	Disable scheduler automatic task group creation.
+
 	nobats		[PPC] Do not use BATs for mapping kernel lowmem
 			on "Classic" PPC cores.
 
@@ -2467,12 +2469,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			to facilitate early boot debugging.
 			See also Documentation/trace/events.txt
 
-	tsc=		Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC.
+	tsc=		Disable clocksource stability checks for TSC.
 			Format: <string>
 			[x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this
-			disables clocksource verification at runtime.
-			Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older
-			hardware, and in virtualized environment.
+			disables clocksource verification at runtime, as well
+			as the stability checks done at bootup.	Used to enable
+			high-resolution timer mode on older hardware, and in
+			virtualized environment.
 			[x86] noirqtime: Do not use TSC to do irq accounting.
 			Used to run time disable IRQ_TIME_ACCOUNTING on any
 			platforms where RDTSC is slow and this accounting

Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+			Trusted and Encrypted Keys
+
+Trusted and Encrypted Keys are two new key types added to the existing kernel
+key ring service.  Both of these new types are variable length symmetic keys,
+and in both cases all keys are created in the kernel, and user space sees,
+stores, and loads only encrypted blobs.  Trusted Keys require the availability
+of a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip for greater security, while Encrypted
+Keys can be used on any system.  All user level blobs, are displayed and loaded
+in hex ascii for convenience, and are integrity verified.
+
+Trusted Keys use a TPM both to generate and to seal the keys.  Keys are sealed
+under a 2048 bit RSA key in the TPM, and optionally sealed to specified PCR
+(integrity measurement) values, and only unsealed by the TPM, if PCRs and blob
+integrity verifications match.  A loaded Trusted Key can be updated with new
+(future) PCR values, so keys are easily migrated to new pcr values, such as
+when the kernel and initramfs are updated.  The same key can have many saved
+blobs under different PCR values, so multiple boots are easily supported.
+
+By default, trusted keys are sealed under the SRK, which has the default
+authorization value (20 zeros).  This can be set at takeownership time with the
+trouser's utility: "tpm_takeownership -u -z".
+
+Usage:
+    keyctl add trusted name "new keylen [options]" ring
+    keyctl add trusted name "load hex_blob [pcrlock=pcrnum]" ring
+    keyctl update key "update [options]"
+    keyctl print keyid
+
+    options:
+       keyhandle= ascii hex value of sealing key default 0x40000000 (SRK)
+       keyauth=	  ascii hex auth for sealing key default 0x00...i
+		  (40 ascii zeros)
+       blobauth=  ascii hex auth for sealed data default 0x00...
+		  (40 ascii zeros)
+       blobauth=  ascii hex auth for sealed data default 0x00...
+		  (40 ascii zeros)
+       pcrinfo=	  ascii hex of PCR_INFO or PCR_INFO_LONG (no default)
+       pcrlock=	  pcr number to be extended to "lock" blob
+       migratable= 0|1 indicating permission to reseal to new PCR values,
+                   default 1 (resealing allowed)
+
+"keyctl print" returns an ascii hex copy of the sealed key, which is in standard
+TPM_STORED_DATA format.  The key length for new keys are always in bytes.
+Trusted Keys can be 32 - 128 bytes (256 - 1024 bits), the upper limit is to fit
+within the 2048 bit SRK (RSA) keylength, with all necessary structure/padding.
+
+Encrypted keys do not depend on a TPM, and are faster, as they use AES for
+encryption/decryption.  New keys are created from kernel generated random
+numbers, and are encrypted/decrypted using a specified 'master' key.  The
+'master' key can either be a trusted-key or user-key type.  The main
+disadvantage of encrypted keys is that if they are not rooted in a trusted key,
+they are only as secure as the user key encrypting them.  The master user key
+should therefore be loaded in as secure a way as possible, preferably early in
+boot.
+
+Usage:
+  keyctl add encrypted name "new key-type:master-key-name keylen" ring
+  keyctl add encrypted name "load hex_blob" ring
+  keyctl update keyid "update key-type:master-key-name"
+
+where 'key-type' is either 'trusted' or 'user'.
+
+Examples of trusted and encrypted key usage:
+
+Create and save a trusted key named "kmk" of length 32 bytes:
+
+    $ keyctl add trusted kmk "new 32" @u
+    440502848
+
+    $ keyctl show
+    Session Keyring
+           -3 --alswrv    500   500  keyring: _ses
+     97833714 --alswrv    500    -1   \_ keyring: _uid.500
+    440502848 --alswrv    500   500       \_ trusted: kmk
+
+    $ keyctl print 440502848
+    0101000000000000000001005d01b7e3f4a6be5709930f3b70a743cbb42e0cc95e18e915
+    3f60da455bbf1144ad12e4f92b452f966929f6105fd29ca28e4d4d5a031d068478bacb0b
+    27351119f822911b0a11ba3d3498ba6a32e50dac7f32894dd890eb9ad578e4e292c83722
+    a52e56a097e6a68b3f56f7a52ece0cdccba1eb62cad7d817f6dc58898b3ac15f36026fec
+    d568bd4a706cb60bb37be6d8f1240661199d640b66fb0fe3b079f97f450b9ef9c22c6d5d
+    dd379f0facd1cd020281dfa3c70ba21a3fa6fc2471dc6d13ecf8298b946f65345faa5ef0
+    f1f8fff03ad0acb083725535636addb08d73dedb9832da198081e5deae84bfaf0409c22b
+    e4a8aea2b607ec96931e6f4d4fe563ba
+
+    $ keyctl pipe 440502848 > kmk.blob
+
+Load a trusted key from the saved blob:
+
+    $ keyctl add trusted kmk "load `cat kmk.blob`" @u
+    268728824
+
+    $ keyctl print 268728824
+    0101000000000000000001005d01b7e3f4a6be5709930f3b70a743cbb42e0cc95e18e915
+    3f60da455bbf1144ad12e4f92b452f966929f6105fd29ca28e4d4d5a031d068478bacb0b
+    27351119f822911b0a11ba3d3498ba6a32e50dac7f32894dd890eb9ad578e4e292c83722
+    a52e56a097e6a68b3f56f7a52ece0cdccba1eb62cad7d817f6dc58898b3ac15f36026fec
+    d568bd4a706cb60bb37be6d8f1240661199d640b66fb0fe3b079f97f450b9ef9c22c6d5d
+    dd379f0facd1cd020281dfa3c70ba21a3fa6fc2471dc6d13ecf8298b946f65345faa5ef0
+    f1f8fff03ad0acb083725535636addb08d73dedb9832da198081e5deae84bfaf0409c22b
+    e4a8aea2b607ec96931e6f4d4fe563ba
+
+Reseal a trusted key under new pcr values:
+
+    $ keyctl update 268728824 "update pcrinfo=`cat pcr.blob`"
+    $ keyctl print 268728824
+    010100000000002c0002800093c35a09b70fff26e7a98ae786c641e678ec6ffb6b46d805
+    77c8a6377aed9d3219c6dfec4b23ffe3000001005d37d472ac8a44023fbb3d18583a4f73
+    d3a076c0858f6f1dcaa39ea0f119911ff03f5406df4f7f27f41da8d7194f45c9f4e00f2e
+    df449f266253aa3f52e55c53de147773e00f0f9aca86c64d94c95382265968c354c5eab4
+    9638c5ae99c89de1e0997242edfb0b501744e11ff9762dfd951cffd93227cc513384e7e6
+    e782c29435c7ec2edafaa2f4c1fe6e7a781b59549ff5296371b42133777dcc5b8b971610
+    94bc67ede19e43ddb9dc2baacad374a36feaf0314d700af0a65c164b7082401740e489c9
+    7ef6a24defe4846104209bf0c3eced7fa1a672ed5b125fc9d8cd88b476a658a4434644ef
+    df8ae9a178e9f83ba9f08d10fa47e4226b98b0702f06b3b8
+
+Create and save an encrypted key "evm" using the above trusted key "kmk":
+
+    $ keyctl add encrypted evm "new trusted:kmk 32" @u
+    159771175
+
+    $ keyctl print 159771175
+    trusted:kmk 32 2375725ad57798846a9bbd240de8906f006e66c03af53b1b382dbbc55
+    be2a44616e4959430436dc4f2a7a9659aa60bb4652aeb2120f149ed197c564e024717c64
+    5972dcb82ab2dde83376d82b2e3c09ffc
+
+    $ keyctl pipe 159771175 > evm.blob
+
+Load an encrypted key "evm" from saved blob:
+
+    $ keyctl add encrypted evm "load `cat evm.blob`" @u
+    831684262
+
+    $ keyctl print 831684262
+    trusted:kmk 32 2375725ad57798846a9bbd240de8906f006e66c03af53b1b382dbbc55
+    be2a44616e4959430436dc4f2a7a9659aa60bb4652aeb2120f149ed197c564e024717c64
+    5972dcb82ab2dde83376d82b2e3c09ffc
+
+
+The initial consumer of trusted keys is EVM, which at boot time needs a high
+quality symmetric key for HMAC protection of file metadata.  The use of a
+trusted key provides strong guarantees that the EVM key has not been
+compromised by a user level problem, and when sealed to specific boot PCR
+values, protects against boot and offline attacks.  Other uses for trusted and
+encrypted keys, such as for disk and file encryption are anticipated.

Documentation/make/headers_install.txt

@@ -39,8 +39,9 @@ INSTALL_HDR_PATH indicates where to install the headers.  It defaults to
 The command "make headers_install_all" exports headers for all architectures
 simultaneously.  (This is mostly of interest to distribution maintainers,
 who create an architecture-independent tarball from the resulting include
-directory.)  Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv"
-or "ln -s" before building a C library with headers exported this way.
+directory.)  You also can use HDR_ARCH_LIST to specify list of architectures.
+Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" or "ln -s"
+before building a C library with headers exported this way.
 
 The kernel header export infrastructure is maintained by David Woodhouse
 <dwmw2@infradead.org>.

Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic

@@ -0,0 +1,327 @@
+Copyright (c) 2009-2010 QLogic Corporation
+QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver
+
+This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be
+distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file.
+You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
+GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as
+Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2).
+
+You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file
+under the following terms:
+
+       1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable),
+          must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
+          conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+       2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above
+          copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
+          following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
+          materials provided with the distribution.
+
+       3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to
+          endorse or promote products derived from this software
+          without specific prior written permission
+
+REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE,
+THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
+BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
+ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT
+CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR
+OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT,
+TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN
+ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN
+COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM.
+
+
+EXHIBIT A
+
+                   GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                      Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                           Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                   GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+                           NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+[state: 21-11-2010]
+
+BATMAN-ADV
+----------
+
+Batman  advanced  is  a new approach to wireless networking which
+does no longer operate on the IP basis. Unlike the batman daemon,
+which  exchanges  information  using UDP packets and sets routing
+tables, batman-advanced operates on ISO/OSI Layer 2 only and uses
+and  routes  (or  better: bridges) Ethernet Frames. It emulates a
+virtual network switch of all nodes participating.  Therefore all
+nodes  appear  to be link local, thus all higher operating proto-
+cols won't be affected by any changes within the network. You can
+run almost any protocol above batman advanced, prominent examples
+are: IPv4, IPv6, DHCP, IPX.
+
+Batman advanced was implemented as a Linux kernel driver  to  re-
+duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other)
+network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet  lan,
+vpn,  etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2).
+
+CONFIGURATION
+-------------
+
+Load the batman-adv module into your kernel:
+
+# insmod batman-adv.ko
+
+The  module  is now waiting for activation. You must add some in-
+terfaces on which batman can operate. After  loading  the  module
+batman  advanced  will scan your systems interfaces to search for
+compatible interfaces. Once found, it will create  subfolders  in
+the /sys directories of each supported interface, e.g.
+
+# ls /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/
+# iface_status  mesh_iface
+
+If an interface does not have the "batman_adv" subfolder it prob-
+ably is not supported. Not supported  interfaces  are:  loopback,
+non-ethernet and batman's own interfaces.
+
+Note:  After the module was loaded it will continuously watch for
+new interfaces to verify the compatibility. There is no  need  to
+reload the module if you plug your USB wifi adapter into your ma-
+chine after batman advanced was initially loaded.
+
+To activate a  given  interface  simply  write  "bat0"  into  its
+"mesh_iface" file inside the batman_adv subfolder:
+
+# echo bat0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface
+
+Repeat  this step for all interfaces you wish to add.  Now batman
+starts using/broadcasting on this/these interface(s).
+
+By reading the "iface_status" file you can check its status:
+
+# cat /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/iface_status
+# active
+
+To deactivate an interface you have  to  write  "none"  into  its
+"mesh_iface" file:
+
+# echo none > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface
+
+
+All  mesh  wide  settings  can be found in batman's own interface
+folder:
+
+#  ls  /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/
+#  aggregated_ogms  bonding  fragmentation  orig_interval
+#  vis_mode
+
+
+There is a special folder for debugging informations:
+
+#  ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/
+#  originators  socket  transtable_global  transtable_local
+#  vis_data
+
+
+Some of the files contain all sort of status information  regard-
+ing  the  mesh  network.  For  example, you can view the table of
+originators (mesh participants) with:
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/originators
+
+Other files allow to change batman's behaviour to better fit your
+requirements.  For instance, you can check the current originator
+interval (value in milliseconds which determines how often batman
+sends its broadcast packets):
+
+# cat /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval
+# 1000
+
+and also change its value:
+
+# echo 3000 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval
+
+In very mobile scenarios, you might want to adjust the originator
+interval to a lower value. This will make the mesh  more  respon-
+sive to topology changes, but will also increase the overhead.
+
+
+USAGE
+-----
+
+To  make use of your newly created mesh, batman advanced provides
+a new interface "bat0" which you should use from this  point  on.
+All  interfaces  added  to  batman  advanced are not relevant any
+longer because batman handles them for you. Basically, one "hands
+over" the data by using the batman interface and batman will make
+sure it reaches its destination.
+
+The "bat0" interface can be used like any  other  regular  inter-
+face.  It needs an IP address which can be either statically con-
+figured or dynamically (by using DHCP or similar services):
+
+# NodeA: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.1
+# NodeB: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.2
+# NodeB: ping 192.168.0.1
+
+Note:  In  order to avoid problems remove all IP addresses previ-
+ously assigned to interfaces now used by batman advanced, e.g.
+
+# ifconfig eth0 0.0.0.0
+
+
+VISUALIZATION
+-------------
+
+If you want topology visualization, at least one mesh  node  must
+be configured as VIS-server:
+
+# echo "server" > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/vis_mode
+
+Each  node  is  either configured as "server" or as "client" (de-
+fault: "client").  Clients send their topology data to the server
+next to them, and server synchronize with other servers. If there
+is no server configured (default) within the  mesh,  no  topology
+information   will  be  transmitted.  With  these  "synchronizing
+servers", there can be 1 or more vis servers sharing the same (or
+at least very similar) data.
+
+When  configured  as  server,  you can get a topology snapshot of
+your mesh:
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/vis_data
+
+This raw output is intended to be easily parsable and convertable
+with  other tools. Have a look at the batctl README if you want a
+vis output in dot or json format for instance and how those  out-
+puts could then be visualised in an image.
+
+The raw format consists of comma separated values per entry where
+each entry is giving information about a  certain  source  inter-
+face.  Each  entry can/has to have the following values:
+-> "mac" - mac address of an originator's source interface
+           (each line begins with it)
+-> "TQ mac  value"  -  src mac's link quality towards mac address
+                       of a neighbor originator's interface which
+                       is being used for routing
+-> "HNA mac" - HNA announced by source mac
+-> "PRIMARY" - this  is a primary interface
+-> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source
+               (requires preceding PRIMARY)
+
+The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being  the  best.
+The HNA entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh
+via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network.  The PRIMARY/SEC
+values are only applied on primary interfaces
+
+
+LOGGING/DEBUGGING
+-----------------
+
+All error messages, warnings and information messages are sent to
+the kernel log. Depending on your operating  system  distribution
+this  can  be read in one of a number of ways. Try using the com-
+mands: dmesg, logread, or looking in the files  /var/log/kern.log
+or  /var/log/syslog.  All  batman-adv  messages are prefixed with
+"batman-adv:" So to see just these messages try
+
+# dmesg | grep batman-adv
+
+When investigating problems with your mesh network  it  is  some-
+times  necessary  to see more detail debug messages. This must be
+enabled when compiling the batman-adv module. When building  bat-
+man-adv  as  part of kernel, use "make menuconfig" and enable the
+option "B.A.T.M.A.N. debugging".
+
+Those additional  debug messages can be accessed  using a special
+file in debugfs
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/log
+
+The additional debug output is by default disabled. It can be en-
+abled  during run time. Following log_levels are defined:
+
+0 - All  debug  output  disabled
+1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting
+2 - Enable route or hna added / changed / deleted
+3 - Enable all messages
+
+The debug output can be changed at runtime  using  the  file
+/sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level. e.g.
+
+# echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level
+
+will enable debug messages for when routes or HNAs change.
+
+
+BATCTL
+------
+
+As batman advanced operates on layer 2 all hosts participating in
+the  virtual switch are completely transparent for all  protocols
+above layer 2. Therefore the common diagnosis tools do  not  work
+as  expected.  To  overcome these problems batctl was created. At
+the  moment the  batctl contains ping,  traceroute,  tcpdump  and
+interfaces to the kernel module settings.
+
+For more information, please see the manpage (man batctl).
+
+batctl is available on http://www.open-mesh.org/
+
+
+CONTACT
+-------
+
+Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :)
+
+IRC:            #batman   on   irc.freenode.org
+Mailing-list:   b.a.t.m.a.n@b.a.t.m.a.n@lists.open-mesh.org
+                (optional   subscription   at
+                 https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n)
+
+You can also contact the Authors:
+
+Marek  Lindner  <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Simon  Wunderlich  <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>

Documentation/networking/dccp.txt

@@ -47,6 +47,26 @@ http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree
 
 Socket options
 ==============
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes
+a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes
+during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are
+defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special,
+and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an
+u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate
+a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to
+be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows:
+	cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP;
+	cmsg->cmsg_type	 = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY;
+	cmsg->cmsg_len	 = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t));	/* or CMSG_LEN(4) */
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero
+value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero,
+the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy
+(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning
+EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the
+lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is
+initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen.
+
 DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of
 service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set,
 the socket will fall back to 0 (which means that no meaningful service code
@@ -147,6 +167,7 @@ rx_ccid = 2
 seq_window = 100
 	The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences
 	the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1).
+	Values in the range Wmin = 32 (RFC 4340, 7.5.2) up to 2^32-1 can be set.
 
 tx_qlen = 5
 	The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds

Documentation/networking/e100.txt

@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data
    ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors.
 
 Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by
-   default. Ethtool can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.
+   default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.
 
    ethtool -s eth?  autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half}
 
@@ -126,30 +126,21 @@ Additional Configurations
   -------
 
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
-  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  Ethtool
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
   version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
 
   The latest release of ethtool can be found from
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
-
-  NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support
-  for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading
-  ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1.
-
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
   Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
   ---------------------------
-  WoL is provided through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with Red
-  Hat* 8.0. For other Linux distributions, download and install Ethtool from
-  the following website: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
-
-  For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page.
+  WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility.  For instructions on enabling
+  WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page.
 
   WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For
   this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be
   loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
 
-
   NAPI
   ----
 

Documentation/networking/e1000.txt

@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ InterruptThrottleRate
 ---------------------
 (not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters)
 Valid Range:   0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative,
-                                   4=simplified balancing)
+                                 4=simplified balancing)
 Default Value: 3
 
 The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter
@@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates
 the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to
 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency".
 
-In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of Tx and
-Rx traffic.  If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+RX traffic.  If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
 interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second.  If the
 traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
 be as high as 8000.
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ NOTE:  Depending on the available system resources, the request for a
 TxDescriptorStep
 ----------------
 Valid Range:    1 (use every Tx Descriptor)
-		4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor)
+                4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor)
 
 Default Value:  1 (use every Tx Descriptor)
 
@@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Valid Range:   0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
 Default Value: 256
 Usage: insmod e1000.ko copybreak=128
 
-Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh Rx
+Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX
 buffer before handing it up the stack.
 
 This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a
@@ -431,15 +431,15 @@ Additional Configurations
   Ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
-  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  Ethtool
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
   version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
 
   The latest release of ethtool can be found from
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
   Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
   ---------------------------
-  WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility.
+  WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility.
 
   WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
   For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be

Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection
-===============================================================
+=============================================
 
 Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
 Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
@@ -61,6 +61,12 @@ per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
 load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
 but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
 
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
 The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
 it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
 that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
@@ -86,8 +92,8 @@ InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates
 the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to
 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency".
 
-In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of Tx and
-Rx traffic.  If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal the
+In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+RX traffic.  If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
 interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second.  If the
 traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
 be as high as 8000.
@@ -177,7 +183,7 @@ Copybreak
 Valid Range:   0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
 Default Value: 256
 
-Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh Rx
+Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX
 buffer before handing it up the stack.
 
 This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a
@@ -223,17 +229,17 @@ loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature.
 
 WriteProtectNVM
 ---------------
-Valid Range: 0-1
-Default Value: 1 (enabled)
-
-Set the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the GbE region in the
-ICHx NVM (non-volatile memory).  This feature can be disabled by the
-WriteProtectNVM module parameter (enabled by default) only after a hardware
-reset, but the machine must be power cycled before trying to enable writes.
-
-Note: the kernel boot option iomem=relaxed may need to be set if the kernel
-config option CONFIG_STRICT_DEVMEM=y, if the root user wants to write the
-NVM from user space via ethtool.
+Valid Range: 0,1
+Default Value: 1
+
+If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the
+GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the
+NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial
+driver load.
+NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes
+via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the
+parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power
+cycle.
 
 Additional Configurations
 =========================
@@ -259,32 +265,30 @@ Additional Configurations
   - Some adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of
     4096 bytes and some adapters do not support Jumbo Frames.
 
-
   Ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
   diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  We
-  strongly recommend downloading the latest version of Ethtool at:
+  strongly recommend downloading the latest version of ethtool at:
 
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
   Speed and Duplex
   ----------------
-  Speed and Duplex are configured through the Ethtool* utility. For
-  instructions,  refer to the Ethtool man page.
+  Speed and Duplex are configured through the ethtool* utility. For
+  instructions,  refer to the ethtool man page.
 
   Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
   ---------------------------
-  WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. For instructions on
-  enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page.
+  WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on
+  enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page.
 
   WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
   For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be
   loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
 
   In most cases Wake On LAN is only supported on port A for multiple port
-  adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on LAN run ethtool eth<X>.
-
+  adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on Lan run ethtool eth<X>.
 
 Support
 =======

Documentation/networking/igb.txt

@@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ Default Value: 0
 This parameter adds support for SR-IOV.  It causes the driver to spawn up to
 max_vfs worth of virtual function.
 
+
 Additional Configurations
 =========================
 
@@ -60,15 +61,16 @@ Additional Configurations
   Ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
-  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest
+  version of ethtool can be found at:
 
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
   Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL)
   ---------------------------
-  WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility.
+  WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility.
 
-  For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page.
+  For instructions on enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page.
 
   WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
   For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be
@@ -91,31 +93,6 @@ Additional Configurations
   REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not
   found, the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts.
 
-  LRO
-  ---
-  Large Receive Offload (LRO) is a technique for increasing inbound throughput
-  of high-bandwidth network connections by reducing CPU overhead. It works by
-  aggregating multiple incoming packets from a single stream into a larger
-  buffer before they are passed higher up the networking stack, thus reducing
-  the number of packets that have to be processed. LRO combines multiple
-  Ethernet frames into a single receive in the stack, thereby potentially
-  decreasing CPU utilization for receives.
-
-  NOTE: You need to have inet_lro enabled via either the CONFIG_INET_LRO or
-  CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE kernel config option. Additionally, if
-  CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE is used, the inet_lro module needs to be loaded
-  before the igb driver.
-
-  You can verify that the driver is using LRO by looking at these counters in
-  Ethtool:
-
-  lro_aggregated - count of total packets that were combined
-  lro_flushed - counts the number of packets flushed out of LRO
-  lro_no_desc - counts the number of times an LRO descriptor was not available
-  for the LRO packet
-
-  NOTE: IPv6 and UDP are not supported by LRO.
-
 Support
 =======
 

Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt

@@ -58,9 +58,11 @@ Additional Configurations
   Ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
-  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
+  version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality, although we
+  strongly recommend downloading the latest version at:
 
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
 Support
 =======

Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt

@@ -11,7 +11,9 @@ ip_forward - BOOLEAN
 	for routers)
 
 ip_default_ttl - INTEGER
-	default 64
+	Default value of TTL field (Time To Live) for outgoing (but not
+	forwarded) IP packets. Should be between 1 and 255 inclusive.
+	Default: 64 (as recommended by RFC1700)
 
 ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN
 	Disable Path MTU Discovery.
@@ -708,10 +710,28 @@ igmp_max_memberships - INTEGER
 	Change the maximum number of multicast groups we can subscribe to.
 	Default: 20
 
-conf/interface/*  changes special settings per interface (where "interface" is
-		  the name of your network interface)
-conf/all/*	  is special, changes the settings for all interfaces
+	Theoretical maximum value is bounded by having to send a membership
+	report in a single datagram (i.e. the report can't span multiple
+	datagrams, or risk confusing the switch and leaving groups you don't
+	intend to).
 
+	The number of supported groups 'M' is bounded by the number of group
+	report entries you can fit into a single datagram of 65535 bytes.
+
+	M = 65536-sizeof (ip header)/(sizeof(Group record))
+
+	Group records are variable length, with a minimum of 12 bytes.
+	So net.ipv4.igmp_max_memberships should not be set higher than:
+
+	(65536-24) / 12 = 5459
+
+	The value 5459 assumes no IP header options, so in practice
+	this number may be lower.
+
+	conf/interface/*  changes special settings per interface (where
+	"interface" is the name of your network interface)
+
+	conf/all/*	  is special, changes the settings for all interfaces
 
 log_martians - BOOLEAN
 	Log packets with impossible addresses to kernel log.

Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt

@@ -309,15 +309,15 @@ Additional Configurations
   Ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
-  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  Ethtool
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
   version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
 
   The latest release of ethtool can be found from
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
-  NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support
-        for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading
-        to the latest version.
+  NOTE: The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options.
+        Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by
+        upgrading to the latest version.
 
 
   NAPI

Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt

@@ -1,107 +1,126 @@
 Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit PCI Express Intel(R) Network Connection
 ========================================================================
 
-March 10, 2009
-
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
 
-- In This Release
 - Identifying Your Adapter
-- Building and Installation
 - Additional Configurations
+- Performance Tuning
+- Known Issues
 - Support
 
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
 
+The driver in this release is compatible with 82598 and 82599-based Intel
+Network Connections.
 
-In This Release
-===============
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
 
-This file describes the ixgbe Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit PCI
-Express Intel(R) Network Connection.  This driver includes support for
-Itanium(R)2-based systems.
+    http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm
 
-For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
-supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter.  All hardware requirements listed apply
-to use with Linux.
+SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics
+----------------------------------
 
-The following features are available in this kernel:
- - Native VLANs
- - Channel Bonding (teaming)
- - SNMP
- - Generic Receive Offload
- - Data Center Bridging
+82599-BASED ADAPTERS
 
-Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
-/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
+NOTES: If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, or
+is an Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel
+optics and/or the direct attach cables listed below.
 
-Ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig can be used to display device and driver
-specific information.
+When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set to
+the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed settings.
+82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply
+with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach
+cables are not supported.
 
+Supplier    Type                                             Part Numbers
 
-Identifying Your Adapter
-========================
+SR Modules
+Intel       DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed)                FTLX8571D3BCV-IT
+Intel       DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed)                AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1
+Intel       DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed)                AFBR-703SDZ-IN2
+LR Modules
+Intel       DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed)                FTLX1471D3BCV-IT
+Intel       DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed)                AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1
+Intel       DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed)                AFCT-701SDZ-IN2
 
-This driver supports devices based on the 82598 controller and the 82599
-controller.
+The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that
+have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices.
 
-For specific information on identifying which adapter you have, please visit:
+Supplier   Type                                              Part Numbers
 
-    http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-008441.htm
+Finisar    SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate                   FTLX8571D3BCL
+Avago      SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate                   AFBR-700SDZ
+Finisar    SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate                   FTLX1471D3BCL
 
+Finisar    DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail)                FTLX8571D3QCV-IT
+Avago      DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail)                AFBR-703SDZ-IN1
+Finisar    DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail)                FTLX1471D3QCV-IT
+Avago      DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail)                AFCT-701SDZ-IN1
+Finistar   1000BASE-T SFP                                    FCLF8522P2BTL
+Avago      1000BASE-T SFP                                    ABCU-5710RZ
 
-Building and Installation
-=========================
+82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach
+cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications.
 
-select m for "Intel(R) 10GbE PCI Express adapters support" located at:
-      Location:
-        -> Device Drivers
-          -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y])
-            -> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) (NETDEV_10000 [=y])
+Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig down
+-------------------------------------------
+"ifconfig down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters.
+"ifconfig up" turns on the later.
 
-1. make modules & make modules_install
 
-2. Load the module:
+82598-BASED ADAPTERS
 
-# modprobe ixgbe
+NOTES for 82598-Based Adapters:
+- Intel(R) Network Adapters that support removable optical modules only support
+  their original module type (i.e., the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit SR Dual Port
+  Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in a different
+  type of module, the driver will not load.
+- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported.
+- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported.
+- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module
+  types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details.
 
-   The insmod command can be used if the full
-   path to the driver module is specified.  For example:
+The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that
+have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices.
 
-     insmod /lib/modules/<KERNEL VERSION>/kernel/drivers/net/ixgbe/ixgbe.ko
+Supplier   Type                                              Part Numbers
 
-   With 2.6 based kernels also make sure that older ixgbe drivers are
-   removed from the kernel, before loading the new module:
+Finisar    SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate                   FTLX8571D3BCL
+Avago      SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate                   AFBR-700SDZ
+Finisar    SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate                   FTLX1471D3BCL
 
-     rmmod ixgbe; modprobe ixgbe
+82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply
+with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach
+cables are not supported.
 
-3. Assign an IP address to the interface by entering the following, where
-   x is the interface number:
 
-     ifconfig ethx <IP_address>
+Flow Control
+------------
+Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable
+receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When TX is enabled, PAUSE
+frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined
+threshold.  When rx is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time delay
+specified when a PAUSE frame is received.
 
-4. Verify that the interface works. Enter the following, where <IP_address>
-   is the IP address for another machine on the same subnet as the interface
-   that is being tested:
+Flow Control is enabled by default. If you want to disable a flow control
+capable link partner, use ethtool:
 
-     ping  <IP_address>
+     ethtool -A eth? autoneg off RX off TX off
 
+NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gig mode, flow control default
+behavior is changed to off.  Flow control in 1 gig mode on these devices can
+lead to Tx hangs.
 
 Additional Configurations
 =========================
 
-  Viewing Link Messages
-  ---------------------
-  Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
-  restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
-  your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:
-
-       dmesg -n 8
-
-  NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
-
-
   Jumbo Frames
   ------------
   The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is
@@ -123,13 +142,8 @@ Additional Configurations
   other protocols besides TCP.  It's also safe to use with configurations that
   are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI.
 
-  GRO is enabled by default in the driver.  Future versions of ethtool will
-  support disabling and re-enabling GRO on the fly.
-
-
   Data Center Bridging, aka DCB
   -----------------------------
-
   DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware.
   It uses the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic.  That means
   that there are 8 different priorities that traffic can be filtered into.
@@ -163,24 +177,71 @@ Additional Configurations
 
         http://e1000.sf.net
 
-
   Ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
-  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  Ethtool
-  version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality.
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest
+  ethtool version is required for this functionality.
 
   The latest release of ethtool can be found from
-  http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel.
+  http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
-
-  NAPI
+  FCoE
   ----
+  This release of the ixgbe driver contains new code to enable users to use
+  Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+  functionality that is supported by the 82598-based hardware.  This code has
+  no default effect on the regular driver operation, and configuring DCB and
+  FCoE is outside the scope of this driver README. Refer to
+  http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact
+  e1000-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information.
+
+  MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+  ----------------------------------
+  When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by
+  the hardware and not transmitted.  An interrupt is sent to the PF driver
+  notifying it of the spoof attempt.
+
+  When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following
+  message to the system log (displayed by  the "dmesg" command):
+
+  Spoof event(s) detected on VF (n)
+
+  Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing.
+
+
+Performance Tuning
+==================
+
+An excellent article on performance tuning can be found at:
+
+http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf
+
+
+Known Issues
+============
+
+  Enabling SR-IOV in a 32-bit Microsoft* Windows* Server 2008 Guest OS using
+  Intel (R) 82576-based GbE or Intel (R) 82599-based 10GbE controller under KVM
+  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+  KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM.  This
+  includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices using
+  Intel 82576-based and 82599-based controllers.
+
+  While direct assignment of a PCIe device or an SR-IOV Virtual Function (VF)
+  to a Linux-based VM running 2.6.32 or later kernel works fine, there is a
+  known issue with Microsoft Windows Server 2008 VM that results in a "yellow
+  bang" error. This problem is within the KVM VMM itself, not the Intel driver,
+  or the SR-IOV logic of the VMM, but rather that KVM emulates an older CPU
+  model for the guests, and this older CPU model does not support MSI-X
+  interrupts, which is a requirement for Intel SR-IOV.
 
-  NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgbe driver.  NAPI is enabled
-  by default in the driver.
+  If you wish to use the Intel 82576 or 82599-based controllers in SR-IOV mode
+  with KVM and a Microsoft Windows Server 2008 guest try the following
+  workaround. The workaround is to tell KVM to emulate a different model of CPU
+  when using qemu to create the KVM guest:
 
-  See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI.
+       "-cpu qemu64,model=13"
 
 
 Support

Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt

@@ -35,10 +35,6 @@ Driver ID Guide at:
 Known Issues/Troubleshooting
 ============================
 
-  Unloading Physical Function (PF) Driver Causes System Reboots When VM is
-  Running and VF is Loaded on the VM
-  ------------------------------------------------------------------------
-  Do not unload the PF driver (ixgbe) while VFs are assigned to guests.
 
 Support
 =======

Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers
 (Synopsys IP blocks); it has been fully tested on STLinux platforms.
 
 Currently this network device driver is for all STM embedded MAC/GMAC
-(7xxx SoCs).
+(7xxx SoCs). Other platforms start using it i.e. ARM SPEAr.
 
 DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and DWC Ether MAC 10/100
 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing the first code
@@ -95,9 +95,14 @@ Several information came from the platform; please refer to the
 driver's Header file in include/linux directory.
 
 struct plat_stmmacenet_data {
-        int bus_id;
-        int pbl;
-        int has_gmac;
+	int bus_id;
+	int pbl;
+	int clk_csr;
+	int has_gmac;
+	int enh_desc;
+	int tx_coe;
+	int bugged_jumbo;
+	int pmt;
         void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed);
         void (*bus_setup)(unsigned long ioaddr);
 #ifdef CONFIG_STM_DRIVERS
@@ -114,6 +119,12 @@ Where:
   registers (on STM platforms);
 - has_gmac: GMAC core is on board (get it at run-time in the next step);
 - bus_id: bus identifier.
+- tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW.
+- enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure.
+- clk_csr: CSR Clock range selection.
+- bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for
+  over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes. Setting this
+  flag the csum will be done in SW on JUMBO frames.
 
 struct plat_stmmacphy_data {
         int bus_id;
@@ -131,13 +142,28 @@ Where:
 - interface: physical MII interface mode;
 - phy_reset: hook to reset HW function.
 
+SOURCES:
+- Kconfig
+- Makefile
+- stmmac_main.c: main network device driver;
+- stmmac_mdio.c: mdio functions;
+- stmmac_ethtool.c: ethtool support;
+- stmmac_timer.[ch]: timer code used for mitigating the driver dma interrupts
+  Only tested on ST40 platforms based.
+- stmmac.h: private driver structure;
+- common.h: common definitions and VFTs;
+- descs.h: descriptor structure definitions;
+- dwmac1000_core.c: GMAC core functions;
+- dwmac1000_dma.c:  dma functions for the GMAC chip;
+- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the GMAC;
+- dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code;
+- dwmac100_dma.c: dma funtions for the MAC chip;
+- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC;
+- dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips
+- enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors
+- norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors
+
 TODO:
-- Continue to make the driver more generic and suitable for other Synopsys
-  Ethernet controllers used on other architectures (i.e. ARM).
-- 10G controllers are not supported.
-- MAC uses Normal descriptors and GMAC uses enhanced ones.
-  This is a limit that should be reviewed. MAC could want to
-  use the enhanced structure.
-- Checksumming: Rx/Tx csum is done in HW in case of GMAC only.
+- XGMAC controller is not supported.
 - Review the timer optimisation code to use an embedded device that seems to be
   available in new chip generations.

Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt

@@ -23,10 +23,10 @@ Once you have resolved the suspend/resume-related problems with your test system
 without the new driver, you are ready to test it:
 
 a) Build the driver as a module, load it and try the test modes of hibernation
-   (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1).
+   (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1).
 
 b) Load the driver and attempt to hibernate in the "reboot", "shutdown" and
-   "platform" modes (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1).
+   "platform" modes (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1).
 
 c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of
    hibernation.
@@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of
 d) Attempt to hibernate with the driver compiled directly into the kernel
    in the "reboot", "shutdown" and "platform" modes.
 
-e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt,
+e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt,
    2).  [As far as the STR tests are concerned, it should not matter whether or
    not the driver is built as a module.]
 
 f) Attempt to suspend to RAM using the s2ram tool with the driver loaded
-   (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2).
+   (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2).
 
 Each of the above tests should be repeated several times and the STD tests
 should be mixed with the STR tests.  If any of them fails, the driver cannot be

Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt

@@ -50,6 +50,15 @@ type's callbacks are not defined) of given device.  The bus type, device type
 and device class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what
 follows.
 
+By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts
+enabled.  However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function
+to tell the PM core that a device's ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume()
+callbacks should be invoked in atomic context with interrupts disabled
+(->runtime_idle() is still invoked the default way).  This implies that these
+callback routines must not block or sleep, but it also means that the
+synchronous helper functions listed at the end of Section 4 can be used within
+an interrupt handler or in an atomic context.
+
 The subsystem-level suspend callback is _entirely_ _responsible_ for handling
 the suspend of the device as appropriate, which may, but need not include
 executing the device driver's own ->runtime_suspend() callback (from the
@@ -237,6 +246,10 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h:
       Section 8); it may be modified only by the pm_runtime_no_callbacks()
       helper function
 
+  unsigned int irq_safe;
+    - indicates that the ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() callbacks
+      will be invoked with the spinlock held and interrupts disabled
+
   unsigned int use_autosuspend;
     - indicates that the device's driver supports delayed autosuspend (see
       Section 9); it may be modified only by the
@@ -344,6 +357,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
     - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
       pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return its result
 
+  int pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend(struct device *dev);
+    - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
+      pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result
+
   int pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
     - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
       pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result
@@ -397,6 +414,11 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
       PM attributes from /sys/devices/.../power (or prevent them from being
       added when the device is registered)
 
+  void pm_runtime_irq_safe(struct device *dev);
+    - set the power.irq_safe flag for the device, causing the runtime-PM
+      suspend and resume callbacks (but not the idle callback) to be invoked
+      with interrupts disabled
+
   void pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(struct device *dev);
     - set the power.last_busy field to the current time
 
@@ -438,6 +460,15 @@ pm_runtime_suspended()
 pm_runtime_mark_last_busy()
 pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration()
 
+If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper
+functions may also be used in interrupt context:
+
+pm_runtime_suspend()
+pm_runtime_autosuspend()
+pm_runtime_resume()
+pm_runtime_get_sync()
+pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend()
+
 5. Run-time PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal
 
 Initially, the run-time PM is disabled for all devices, which means that the

Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt

@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ order to avoid the degeneration that had become the ppc32 kernel entry
 point and the way a new platform should be added to the kernel. The
 legacy iSeries platform breaks those rules as it predates this scheme,
 but no new board support will be accepted in the main tree that
-doesn't follows them properly.  In addition, since the advent of the
+doesn't follow them properly.  In addition, since the advent of the
 arch/powerpc merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64, new 32-bit
 platforms and 32-bit platforms which move into arch/powerpc will be
 required to use these rules as well.
@@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ dtc source code can be found at
 
 WARNING: This version is still in early development stage; the
 resulting device-tree "blobs" have not yet been validated with the
-kernel. The current generated bloc lacks a useful reserve map (it will
+kernel. The current generated block lacks a useful reserve map (it will
 be fixed to generate an empty one, it's up to the bootloader to fill
 it up) among others. The error handling needs work, bugs are lurking,
 etc...

Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/cpm.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+PPC4xx Clock Power Management (CPM) node
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible		: compatible list, currently only "ibm,cpm"
+	- dcr-access-method	: "native"
+	- dcr-reg		: < DCR register range >
+
+Optional properties:
+	- er-offset		: All 4xx SoCs with a CPM controller have
+				  one of two different order for the CPM
+				  registers. Some have the CPM registers
+				  in the following order (ER,FR,SR). The
+				  others have them in the following order
+				  (SR,ER,FR). For the second case set
+				  er-offset = <1>.
+	- unused-units		: specifier consist of one cell. For each
+				  bit in the cell, the corresponding bit
+				  in CPM will be set to turn off unused
+				  devices.
+	- idle-doze		: specifier consist of one cell. For each
+				  bit in the cell, the corresponding bit
+				  in CPM will be set to turn off unused
+				  devices. This is usually just CPM[CPU].
+	- standby		: specifier consist of one cell. For each
+				  bit in the cell, the corresponding bit
+				  in CPM will be set on standby and
+				  restored on resume.
+	- suspend		: specifier consist of one cell. For each
+				  bit in the cell, the corresponding bit
+				  in CPM will be set on suspend (mem) and
+				  restored on resume. Note, for standby
+				  and suspend the corresponding bits can
+				  be different or the same. Usually for
+				  standby only class 2 and 3 units are set.
+				  However, the interface does not care.
+				  If they are the same, the additional
+				  power saving will be seeing if support
+				  is available to put the DDR in self
+				  refresh mode and any additional power
+				  saving techniques for the specific SoC.
+
+Example:
+	CPM0: cpm {
+		compatible = "ibm,cpm";
+		dcr-access-method = "native";
+		dcr-reg = <0x160 0x003>;
+		er-offset = <0>;
+		unused-units = <0x00000100>;
+		idle-doze = <0x02000000>;
+		standby = <0xfeff0000>;
+		suspend = <0xfeff791d>;
+};

Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/eeprom.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+EEPROMs (I2C)
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : should be "<manufacturer>,<type>"
+		 If there is no specific driver for <manufacturer>, a generic
+		 driver based on <type> is selected. Possible types are:
+		 24c00, 24c01, 24c02, 24c04, 24c08, 24c16, 24c32, 24c64,
+		 24c128, 24c256, 24c512, 24c1024, spd
+
+  - reg : the I2C address of the EEPROM
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - pagesize : the length of the pagesize for writing. Please consult the
+               manual of your device, that value varies a lot. A wrong value
+	       may result in data loss! If not specified, a safety value of
+	       '1' is used which will be very slow.
+
+  - read-only: this parameterless property disables writes to the eeprom
+
+Example:
+
+eeprom@52 {
+	compatible = "atmel,24c32";
+	reg = <0x52>;
+	pagesize = <32>;
+};

Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas

@@ -1,3 +1,25 @@
+Release Date    : Tues.  Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford
+Current Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1
+Old Version     : 00.00.04.31-rc1
+    1. Rename megaraid_sas.c to megaraid_sas_base.c.
+    2. Update GPL headers.
+    3. Add MSI-X support and 'msix_disable' module parameter.
+    4. Use lowest memory bar (for SR-IOV VF support).
+    5. Add struct megasas_instance_temlate changes, and change all code to use
+       new instance entries:
+
+       irqreturn_t (*service_isr )(int irq, void *devp);
+       void (*tasklet)(unsigned long);
+       u32 (*init_adapter)(struct megasas_instance *);
+       u32 (*build_and_issue_cmd) (struct megasas_instance *,
+       struct scsi_cmnd *);
+       void (*issue_dcmd) (struct megasas_instance *instance,
+                              struct megasas_cmd *cmd);
+
+   6. Add code to support MegaRAID 9265/9285 controllers device id (0x5b).
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 1 Release Date    : Thur.  May 03, 2010 09:12:45 PST 2009 -
 			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
 			Bo Yang

Documentation/serial/00-INDEX

@@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ riscom8.txt
 	- notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver.
 rocket.txt
 	- info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver.
+serial-rs485.txt
+	- info about RS485 structures and support in the kernel.
 specialix.txt
 	- info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card.
 stallion.txt

Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+                        RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
+
+1. INTRODUCTION
+
+   EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the
+   electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced
+   digital multipoint systems.
+   This standard is widely used for communications in industrial automation
+   because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically
+   noisy environments.
+
+2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS
+
+   Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in
+   half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by
+   toggling RTS or DTR signals. That can be used to control external
+   half-duplex hardware like an RS485 transceiver or any RS232-connected
+   half-duplex devices like some modems.
+
+   For these microcontrollers, the Linux driver should be made capable of
+   working in both modes, and proper ioctls (see later) should be made
+   available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and
+   vice versa.
+
+3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL
+
+   The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle
+   RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485
+   parameters in the platform data and in ioctls.
+
+   Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should
+   provide at least the following ioctls:
+
+    - TIOCSRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542F). This ioctl is used
+      to enable/disable RS485 mode from user-space
+
+    - TIOCGRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542E). This ioctl is used
+      to get RS485 mode from kernel-space (i.e., driver) to user-space.
+
+   In other words, the serial driver should contain a code similar to the next
+   one:
+
+	static struct uart_ops atmel_pops = {
+		/* ... */
+		.ioctl		= handle_ioctl,
+	};
+
+	static int handle_ioctl(struct uart_port *port,
+		unsigned int cmd,
+		unsigned long arg)
+	{
+		struct serial_rs485 rs485conf;
+
+		switch (cmd) {
+		case TIOCSRS485:
+			if (copy_from_user(&rs485conf,
+				(struct serial_rs485 *) arg,
+				sizeof(rs485conf)))
+					return -EFAULT;
+
+			/* ... */
+			break;
+
+		case TIOCGRS485:
+			if (copy_to_user((struct serial_rs485 *) arg,
+				...,
+				sizeof(rs485conf)))
+					return -EFAULT;
+			/* ... */
+			break;
+
+		/* ... */
+		}
+	}
+
+
+4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL
+
+   From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous
+   ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code:
+
+	#include <linux/serial.h>
+
+	/* Driver-specific ioctls: */
+	#define TIOCGRS485      0x542E
+	#define TIOCSRS485      0x542F
+
+	/* Open your specific device (e.g., /dev/mydevice): */
+	int fd = open ("/dev/mydevice", O_RDWR);
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		/* Error handling. See errno. */
+	}
+
+	struct serial_rs485 rs485conf;
+
+	/* Set RS485 mode: */
+	rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_ENABLED;
+
+	/* Set rts delay before send, if needed: */
+	rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_BEFORE_SEND;
+	rs485conf.delay_rts_before_send = ...;
+
+	/* Set rts delay after send, if needed: */
+	rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND;
+	rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...;
+
+	if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) {
+		/* Error handling. See errno. */
+	}
+
+	/* Use read() and write() syscalls here... */
+
+	/* Close the device when finished: */
+	if (close (fd) < 0) {
+		/* Error handling. See errno. */
+	}
+
+5. REFERENCES
+
+ [1]	include/linux/serial.h

Documentation/spi/pxa2xx

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers
 -----------------------------------
 Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a
 "platform device".  The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table
-found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h:
+found in include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h:
 
 struct pxa2xx_spi_master {
 	enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type;
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See
 
 Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration
 information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in
-"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h".  The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
+"include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h".  The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
 will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave
 device. All fields are optional.
 

Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt

@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ dmesg_restrict:
 This toggle indicates whether unprivileged users are prevented from using
 dmesg(8) to view messages from the kernel's log buffer.  When
 dmesg_restrict is set to (0) there are no restrictions.  When
-dmesg_restrict is set set to (1), users must have CAP_SYS_ADMIN to use
+dmesg_restrict is set set to (1), users must have CAP_SYSLOG to use
 dmesg(8).
 
 The kernel config option CONFIG_SECURITY_DMESG_RESTRICT sets the default

Documentation/trace/events-power.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+
+			Subsystem Trace Points: power
+
+The power tracing system captures events related to power transitions
+within the kernel. Broadly speaking there are three major subheadings:
+
+  o Power state switch which reports events related to suspend (S-states),
+     cpuidle (C-states) and cpufreq (P-states)
+  o System clock related changes
+  o Power domains related changes and transitions
+
+This document describes what each of the tracepoints is and why they
+might be useful.
+
+Cf. include/trace/events/power.h for the events definitions.
+
+1. Power state switch events
+============================
+
+1.1 New trace API
+-----------------
+
+A 'cpu' event class gathers the CPU-related events: cpuidle and
+cpufreq.
+
+cpu_idle		"state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+cpu_frequency		"state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+
+A suspend event is used to indicate the system going in and out of the
+suspend mode:
+
+machine_suspend		"state=%lu"
+
+
+Note: the value of '-1' or '4294967295' for state means an exit from the current state,
+i.e. trace_cpu_idle(4, smp_processor_id()) means that the system
+enters the idle state 4, while trace_cpu_idle(PWR_EVENT_EXIT, smp_processor_id())
+means that the system exits the previous idle state.
+
+The event which has 'state=4294967295' in the trace is very important to the user
+space tools which are using it to detect the end of the current state, and so to
+correctly draw the states diagrams and to calculate accurate statistics etc.
+
+1.2 DEPRECATED trace API
+------------------------
+
+A new Kconfig option CONFIG_EVENT_POWER_TRACING_DEPRECATED with the default value of
+'y' has been created. This allows the legacy trace power API to be used conjointly
+with the new trace API.
+The Kconfig option, the old trace API (in include/trace/events/power.h) and the
+old trace points will disappear in a future release (namely 2.6.41).
+
+power_start		"type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+power_frequency		"type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+power_end		"cpu_id=%lu"
+
+The 'type' parameter takes one of those macros:
+ . POWER_NONE	= 0,
+ . POWER_CSTATE	= 1,	/* C-State */
+ . POWER_PSTATE	= 2,	/* Fequency change or DVFS */
+
+The 'state' parameter is set depending on the type:
+ . Target C-state for type=POWER_CSTATE,
+ . Target frequency for type=POWER_PSTATE,
+
+power_end is used to indicate the exit of a state, corresponding to the latest
+power_start event.
+
+2. Clocks events
+================
+The clock events are used for clock enable/disable and for
+clock rate change.
+
+clock_enable		"%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+clock_disable		"%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+clock_set_rate		"%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+
+The first parameter gives the clock name (e.g. "gpio1_iclk").
+The second parameter is '1' for enable, '0' for disable, the target
+clock rate for set_rate.
+
+3. Power domains events
+=======================
+The power domain events are used for power domains transitions
+
+power_domain_target	"%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
+
+The first parameter gives the power domain name (e.g. "mpu_pwrdm").
+The second parameter is the power domain target state.
+

Documentation/usb/power-management.txt

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 		 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
 
-			    December 11, 2009
+			    October 28, 2010
 
 
 
@@ -107,9 +107,14 @@ allowed to issue dynamic suspends.
 The user interface for controlling dynamic PM is located in the power/
 subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in
 /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID.  The
-relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and autosuspend.
-(There may also be a file named "level"; this file was deprecated
-as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.)
+relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and
+autosuspend_delay_ms.  (There may also be a file named "level"; this
+file was deprecated as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the
+"control" file.  In 2.6.38 the "autosuspend" file will be deprecated
+and replaced by the "autosuspend_delay_ms" file.  The only difference
+is that the newer file expresses the delay in milliseconds whereas the
+older file uses seconds.  Confusingly, both files are present in 2.6.37
+but only "autosuspend" works.)
 
 	power/wakeup
 
@@ -140,33 +145,36 @@ as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.)
 		suspended and autoresume was not allowed.  This
 		setting is no longer supported.)
 
-	power/autosuspend
+	power/autosuspend_delay_ms
 
 		This file contains an integer value, which is the
-		number of seconds the device should remain idle before
-		the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay time).
-		The default is 2.  0 means to autosuspend as soon as
-		the device becomes idle, and negative values mean
-		never to autosuspend.  You can write a number to the
-		file to change the autosuspend idle-delay time.
-
-Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend and writing "on" to power/control do
-essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the device from being
-autosuspended.  Yes, this is a redundancy in the API.
+		number of milliseconds the device should remain idle
+		before the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay
+		time).  The default is 2000.  0 means to autosuspend
+		as soon as the device becomes idle, and negative
+		values mean never to autosuspend.  You can write a
+		number to the file to change the autosuspend
+		idle-delay time.
+
+Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend_delay_ms and writing "on" to
+power/control do essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the
+device from being autosuspended.  Yes, this is a redundancy in the
+API.
 
 (In 2.6.21 writing "0" to power/autosuspend would prevent the device
 from being autosuspended; the behavior was changed in 2.6.22.  The
 power/autosuspend attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.21, and the
 power/level attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.22.  power/control
-was added in 2.6.34.)
+was added in 2.6.34, and power/autosuspend_delay_ms was added in
+2.6.37 but did not become functional until 2.6.38.)
 
 
 	Changing the default idle-delay time
 	------------------------------------
 
-The default autosuspend idle-delay time is controlled by a module
-parameter in usbcore.  You can specify the value when usbcore is
-loaded.  For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would
+The default autosuspend idle-delay time (in seconds) is controlled by
+a module parameter in usbcore.  You can specify the value when usbcore
+is loaded.  For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would
 do:
 
 	modprobe usbcore autosuspend=5
@@ -234,25 +242,23 @@ every device.
 
 If a driver knows that its device has proper suspend/resume support,
 it can enable autosuspend all by itself.  For example, the video
-driver for a laptop's webcam might do this, since these devices are
-rarely used and so should normally be autosuspended.
+driver for a laptop's webcam might do this (in recent kernels they
+do), since these devices are rarely used and so should normally be
+autosuspended.
 
 Sometimes it turns out that even when a device does work okay with
-autosuspend there are still problems.  For example, there are
-experimental patches adding autosuspend support to the usbhid driver,
-which manages keyboards and mice, among other things.  Tests with a
-number of keyboards showed that typing on a suspended keyboard, while
-causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, would
-nonetheless frequently result in lost keystrokes.  Tests with mice
-showed that some of them would issue a remote-wakeup request in
-response to button presses but not to motion, and some in response to
-neither.
+autosuspend there are still problems.  For example, the usbhid driver,
+which manages keyboards and mice, has autosuspend support.  Tests with
+a number of keyboards show that typing on a suspended keyboard, while
+causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, will nonetheless
+frequently result in lost keystrokes.  Tests with mice show that some
+of them will issue a remote-wakeup request in response to button
+presses but not to motion, and some in response to neither.
 
 The kernel will not prevent you from enabling autosuspend on devices
 that can't handle it.  It is even possible in theory to damage a
-device by suspending it at the wrong time -- for example, suspending a
-USB hard disk might cause it to spin down without parking the heads.
-(Highly unlikely, but possible.)  Take care.
+device by suspending it at the wrong time.  (Highly unlikely, but
+possible.)  Take care.
 
 
 	The driver interface for Power Management
@@ -336,10 +342,6 @@ autosuspend the interface's device.  When the usage counter is = 0
 then the interface is considered to be idle, and the kernel may
 autosuspend the device.
 
-(There is a similar usage counter field in struct usb_device,
-associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces.
-This counter is used only by the USB core.)
-
 Drivers need not be concerned about balancing changes to the usage
 counter; the USB core will undo any remaining "get"s when a driver
 is unbound from its interface.  As a corollary, drivers must not call
@@ -409,11 +411,11 @@ during autosuspend.  For example, there's not much point
 autosuspending a keyboard if the user can't cause the keyboard to do a
 remote wakeup by typing on it.  If the driver sets
 intf->needs_remote_wakeup to 1, the kernel won't autosuspend the
-device if remote wakeup isn't available or has been disabled through
-the power/wakeup attribute.  (If the device is already autosuspended,
-though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to autoresume it.
-Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe method, at which
-time the device is guaranteed not to be autosuspended.)
+device if remote wakeup isn't available.  (If the device is already
+autosuspended, though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to
+autoresume it.  Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe
+method, at which time the device is guaranteed not to be
+autosuspended.)
 
 If a driver does its I/O asynchronously in interrupt context, it
 should call usb_autopm_get_interface_async() before starting output and
@@ -422,20 +424,19 @@ it receives an input event, it should call
 
 	usb_mark_last_busy(struct usb_device *udev);
 
-in the event handler.  This sets udev->last_busy to the current time.
-udev->last_busy is the field used for idle-delay calculations;
-updating it will cause any pending autosuspend to be moved back.  Most
-of the usb_autopm_* routines will also set the last_busy field to the
-current time.
+in the event handler.  This tells the PM core that the device was just
+busy and therefore the next autosuspend idle-delay expiration should
+be pushed back.  Many of the usb_autopm_* routines also make this call,
+so drivers need to worry only when interrupt-driven input arrives.
 
 Asynchronous operation is always subject to races.  For example, a
-driver may call one of the usb_autopm_*_interface_async() routines at
-a time when the core has just finished deciding the device has been
-idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's
-suspend method.  The suspend method must be responsible for
-synchronizing with the output request routine and the URB completion
-handler; it should cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the
-driver needs to use the device.
+driver may call the usb_autopm_get_interface_async() routine at a time
+when the core has just finished deciding the device has been idle for
+long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's suspend
+method.  The suspend method must be responsible for synchronizing with
+the I/O request routine and the URB completion handler; it should
+cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the driver needs to use the
+device.
 
 External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way,
 only autosuspend calls.  The driver can tell them apart by checking
@@ -472,7 +473,9 @@ Firstly, a device may already be autosuspended when a system suspend
 occurs.  Since system suspends are supposed to be as transparent as
 possible, the device should remain suspended following the system
 resume.  But this theory may not work out well in practice; over time
-the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed.
+the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed.  As of 2.6.37 the
+policy is to resume all devices during a system resume and let them
+handle their own runtime suspends afterward.
 
 Secondly, a dynamic power-management event may occur as a system
 suspend is underway.  The window for this is short, since system

Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
   0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber             (em2800)        [eb1a:2800]
-  1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber        (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868]
+  1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber        (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868,eb1a:2875]
   2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB                 (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036]
   3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2                      (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208]
   4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2                    (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201]
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
   8 -> Kworld USB2800                           (em2800)
   9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker  (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a]
  10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900                  (em2880)        [2040:6500]
- 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS                       (em2880)        [0ccd:0042]
+ 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS                       (em2880)
  12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF                    (em2820/em2840)
  13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS                      (em2880)        [0ccd:0047]
  14 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR / Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840)
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
  52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid                           (em2881)
  53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro                      (em2881)
  54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR                    (em2882)        [eb1a:e323]
- 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882)              (em2882)        [0ccd:005e]
+ 55 -> Terratec Cinnergy Hybrid T USB XS (em2882) (em2882)        [0ccd:005e,0ccd:0042]
  56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2)                  (em2882)        [2304:0226]
  57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330              (em2883)        [eb1a:a316]
  58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo           (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041]

Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134

@@ -180,3 +180,5 @@
 179 -> Beholder BeholdTV A7                     [5ace:7090]
 180 -> Avermedia PCI M733A                      [1461:4155,1461:4255]
 181 -> TechoTrend TT-budget T-3000              [13c2:2804]
+182 -> Kworld PCI SBTVD/ISDB-T Full-Seg Hybrid  [17de:b136]
+183 -> Compro VideoMate Vista M1F               [185b:c900]

Documentation/video4linux/Makefile

@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
-obj- := dummy.o
-
-# List of programs to build
-hostprogs-y := v4lgrab
-
-# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
-always := $(hostprogs-y)

Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia

@@ -1,191 +0,0 @@
-This is a driver for the CPiA PPC2 driven parallel connected
-Camera. For example the Creative WebcamII is CPiA driven.
-
-   ) [1]Peter Pregler, Linz 2000, published under the [2]GNU GPL
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-USAGE:
-
-General:
-========
-
-1) Make sure you have created the video devices (/dev/video*):
-
-- if you have a recent MAKEDEV do a 'cd /dev;./MAKEDEV video'
-- otherwise do a:
-
-cd /dev
-mknod video0 c 81 0
-ln -s video0 video
-
-2) Compile the kernel (see below for the list of options to use),
-   configure your parport and reboot.
-
-3) If all worked well you should get messages similar
-   to the following (your versions may be different) on the console:
-
-V4L-Driver for Vision CPiA based cameras v0.7.4
-parport0: read2 timeout.
-parport0: Multimedia device, VLSI Vision Ltd PPC2
-Parallel port driver for Vision CPiA based camera
-  CPIA Version: 1.20 (2.0)
-  CPIA PnP-ID: 0553:0002:0100
-  VP-Version: 1.0 0100
-  1 camera(s) found
-
-
-As modules:
-===========
-
-Make sure you have selected the following kernel options (you can
-select all stuff as modules):
-
-The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'.
-
-CONFIG_PARPORT=m
-CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=m
-CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y
-CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y
-CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m
-CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=m
-CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=m
-
-For autoloading of all those modules you need to tell module-init-tools
-some stuff. Add the following line to your module-init-tools config-file
-(e.g. /etc/modprobe.conf or wherever your distribution does store that
-stuff):
-
-options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=7 dma=3
-alias char-major-81 cpia_pp
-
-The first line tells the dma/irq channels to use. Those _must_ match
-the settings of your BIOS. Do NOT simply use the values above.  See
-Documentation/parport.txt for more information about this. The second
-line associates the video-device file with the driver. Of cause you
-can also load the modules once upon boot (usually done in /etc/modules).
-
-Linked into the kernel:
-=======================
-
-Make sure you have selected the following kernel options. Note that
-you cannot compile the parport-stuff as modules and the cpia-driver
-statically (the other way round is okay though).
-
-The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'.
-
-CONFIG_PARPORT=y
-CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=y
-CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y
-CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y
-CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=y
-CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=y
-CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=y
-
-To use DMA/irq you will need to tell the kernel upon boot time the
-hardware configuration of the parport. You can give the boot-parameter
-at the LILO-prompt or specify it in lilo.conf. I use the following
-append-line in lilo.conf:
-
-	append="parport=0x378,7,3"
-
-See Documentation/parport.txt for more information about the
-configuration of the parport and the values given above. Do not simply
-use the values given above.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-FEATURES:
-
-- mmap/read v4l-interface (but no overlay)
-- image formats: CIF/QCIF, SIF/QSIF, various others used by isabel;
-  note: all sizes except CIF/QCIF are implemented by clipping, i.e.
-  pixels are not uploaded from the camera
-- palettes: VIDEO_PALETTE_GRAY, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555,
-  VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB32, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUYV,
-  VIDEO_PALETTE_UYVY, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUV422
-- state information (color balance, exposure, ...) is preserved between
-  device opens
-- complete control over camera via proc-interface (_all_ camera settings are
-  supported), there is also a python-gtk application available for this [3]
-- works under SMP (but the driver is completely serialized and synchronous)
-  so you get no benefit from SMP, but at least it does not crash your box
-- might work for non-Intel architecture, let us know about this
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-TESTED APPLICATIONS:
-
-- a simple test application based on Xt is available at [3]
-- another test-application based on gqcam-0.4 (uses GTK)
-- gqcam-0.6 should work
-- xawtv-3.x (also the webcam software)
-- xawtv-2.46
-- w3cam (cgi-interface and vidcat, e.g. you may try out 'vidcat  |xv
-  -maxpect -root -quit +noresetroot -rmode 5 -')
-- vic, the MBONE video conferencing tool (version 2.8ucl4-1)
-- isabel 3R4beta (barely working, but AFAICT all the problems are on
-  their side)
-- camserv-0.40
-
-See [3] for pointers to v4l-applications.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-KNOWN PROBLEMS:
-
-- some applications do not handle the image format correctly, you will
-  see strange horizontal stripes instead of a nice picture -> make sure
-  your application does use a supported image size or queries the driver
-  for the actually used size (reason behind this: the camera cannot
-  provide any image format, so if size NxM is requested the driver will
-  use a format to the closest fitting N1xM1, the application should now
-  query for this granted size, most applications do not).
-- all the todo ;)
-- if there is not enough light and the picture is too dark try to
-  adjust the SetSensorFPS setting, automatic frame rate adjustment
-  has its price
-- do not try out isabel 3R4beta (built 135), you will be disappointed
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-TODO:
-
-- multiple camera support (struct camera or something) - This should work,
-  but hasn't been tested yet.
-- architecture independence?
-- SMP-safe asynchronous mmap interface
-- nibble mode for old parport interfaces
-- streaming capture, this should give a performance gain
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-IMPLEMENTATION NOTES:
-
-The camera can act in two modes, streaming or grabbing. Right now a
-polling grab-scheme is used. Maybe interrupt driven streaming will be
-used for a asynchronous mmap interface in the next major release of the
-driver. This might give a better frame rate.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-THANKS (in no particular order):
-
-- Scott J. Bertin <sbertin@mindspring.com> for cleanups, the proc-filesystem
-  and much more
-- Henry Bruce <whb@vvl.co.uk> for providing developers information about
-  the CPiA chip, I wish all companies would treat Linux as seriously
-- Karoly Erdei <Karoly.Erdei@risc.uni-linz.ac.at> and RISC-Linz for being
-  my boss ;) resp. my employer and for providing me the hardware and
-  allow me to devote some working time to this project
-- Manuel J. Petit de Gabriel <mpetit@dit.upm.es> for providing help
-  with Isabel (http://isabel.dit.upm.es/)
-- Bas Huisman <bhuism@cs.utwente.nl> for writing the initial parport code
-- Jarl Totland <Jarl.Totland@bdc.no> for setting up the mailing list
-  and maintaining the web-server[3]
-- Chris Whiteford <Chris@informinteractive.com> for fixes related to the
-  1.02 firmware
-- special kudos to all the tester whose machines crashed and/or
-  will crash. :)
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-REFERENCES
-
-   1. http://www.risc.uni-linz.ac.at/
-      mailto:Peter_Pregler@email.com
-   2. see the file COPYING in the top directory of the kernel tree
-   3. http://webcam.sourceforge.net/

Documentation/video4linux/Zoran

@@ -322,76 +322,11 @@ your IRQs and make sure the card has its own interrupts.
 
 4. Programming interface
 
-This driver conforms to video4linux and video4linux2, both can be used to
-use the driver. Since video4linux didn't provide adequate calls to fully
-use the cards' features, we've introduced several programming extensions,
-which are currently officially accepted in the 2.4.x branch of the kernel.
-These extensions are known as the v4l/mjpeg extensions. See zoran.h for
-details (structs/ioctls).
-
-Information - video4linux:
-http://linux.bytesex.org/v4l2/API.html
-Documentation/video4linux/API.html
-/usr/include/linux/videodev.h
-
-Information - video4linux/mjpeg extensions:
-./zoran.h
-(also see below)
-
-Information - video4linux2:
-http://linuxtv.org
-http://v4l2spec.bytesex.org/
-/usr/include/linux/videodev2.h
-
-More information on the video4linux/mjpeg extensions, by Serguei
-Miridonovi and Rainer Johanni:
---
-The ioctls for that interface are as follows:
-
-BUZIOC_G_PARAMS
-BUZIOC_S_PARAMS
-
-Get and set the parameters of the buz. The user should always do a
-BUZIOC_G_PARAMS (with a struct buz_params) to obtain the default
-settings, change what he likes and then make a BUZIOC_S_PARAMS call.
-
-BUZIOC_REQBUFS
-
-Before being able to capture/playback, the user has to request
-the buffers he is wanting to use. Fill the structure
-zoran_requestbuffers with the size (recommended: 256*1024) and
-the number (recommended 32 up to 256). There are no such restrictions
-as for the Video for Linux buffers, you should LEAVE SUFFICIENT
-MEMORY for your system however, else strange things will happen ....
-On return, the zoran_requestbuffers structure contains number and
-size of the actually allocated buffers.
-You should use these numbers for doing a mmap of the buffers
-into the user space.
-The BUZIOC_REQBUFS ioctl also makes it happen, that the next mmap
-maps the MJPEG buffer instead of the V4L buffers.
-
-BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT
-BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY
-
-Queue a buffer for capture or playback. The first call also starts
-streaming capture. When streaming capture is going on, you may
-only queue further buffers or issue syncs until streaming
-capture is switched off again with a argument of -1 to
-a BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT/BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY ioctl.
-
-BUZIOC_SYNC
-
-Issue this ioctl when all buffers are queued. This ioctl will
-block until the first buffer becomes free for saving its
-data to disk (after BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT) or for reuse (after BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY).
-
-BUZIOC_G_STATUS
-
-Get the status of the input lines (video source connected/norm).
+This driver conforms to video4linux2. Support for V4L1 and for the custom
+zoran ioctls has been removed in kernel 2.6.38.
 
 For programming example, please, look at lavrec.c and lavplay.c code in
-lavtools-1.2p2 package (URL: http://www.cicese.mx/)
-and the 'examples' directory in the original Buz driver distribution.
+the MJPEG-tools (http://mjpeg.sf.net/).
 
 Additional notes for software developers:
 
@@ -402,9 +337,6 @@ Additional notes for software developers:
    standard is "more constant" for current country than geometry
    settings of a variety of TV capture cards which may work in ITU or
    square pixel format.
---
-Please note that lavplay/lavrec are also included in the MJPEG-tools
-(http://mjpeg.sf.net/).
 
 ===========================
 

Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards

@@ -464,10 +464,6 @@ Siemens
 -------
    Multimedia eXtension Board (MXB) (SAA7146, SAA7111)
 
-Stradis
--------
-   SDM275,SDM250,SDM026,SDM025 (SAA7146, IBMMPEG2): MPEG2 decoder only
-
 Powercolor
 ----------
    MTV878

Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt

@@ -366,6 +366,7 @@ t613		17a1:0128	TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops
 vc032x		17ef:4802	Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC
 pac207		2001:f115	D-Link DSB-C120
 sq905c		2770:9050	Disney pix micro (CIF)
+sq905c		2770:9051	Lego Bionicle
 sq905c		2770:9052	Disney pix micro 2 (VGA)
 sq905c		2770:905c	All 11 known cameras with this ID
 sq905		2770:9120	All 24 known cameras with this ID

Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt

@@ -45,8 +45,6 @@ module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the
 module or meye.<param>=<value> on the kernel boot line when meye is
 statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
 
-	forcev4l1:	force use of V4L1 API instead of V4L2
-
 	gbuffers:	number of capture buffers, default is 2 (32 max)
 
 	gbufsize:	size of each capture buffer, default is 614400
@@ -79,9 +77,8 @@ Usage:
 Private API:
 ------------
 
-	The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API
-	(either v4l1 or v4l2), so all video4linux tools (like xawtv)
-	should work with this driver.
+	The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API,
+	so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) should work with this driver.
 
 	Besides the video4linux interface, the driver has a private interface
 	for accessing the Motion Eye extended parameters (camera sharpness,
@@ -123,7 +120,4 @@ Private API:
 Bugs / Todo:
 ------------
 
-	- the driver could be much cleaned up by removing the v4l1 support.
-	  However, this means all v4l1-only applications will stop working.
-
 	- 'motioneye' still uses the meye private v4l1 API extensions.

Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c

@@ -1,201 +0,0 @@
-/* Simple Video4Linux image grabber. */
-/*
- *	Video4Linux Driver Test/Example Framegrabbing Program
- *
- *	Compile with:
- *		gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab
- *	Use as:
- *		v4lgrab >image.ppm
- *
- *	Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org>
- *	Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c
- *	with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu).
- *
- *
- *	For some cameras you may need to pre-load libv4l to perform
- *	the necessary decompression, e.g.:
- *
- *	export LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libv4l/v4l1compat.so
- *	./v4lgrab >image.ppm
- *
- *	see http://hansdegoede.livejournal.com/3636.html for details.
- *
- */
-
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-
-#include <linux/types.h>
-#include <linux/videodev.h>
-
-#define VIDEO_DEV "/dev/video0"
-
-/* Stole this from tvset.c */
-
-#define READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(buf, format, depth, r, g, b)                   \
-{                                                                       \
-	switch (format)                                                 \
-	{                                                               \
-		case VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY:                                \
-			switch (depth)                                  \
-			{                                               \
-				case 4:                                 \
-				case 6:                                 \
-				case 8:                                 \
-					(r) = (g) = (b) = (*buf++ << 8);\
-					break;                          \
-									\
-				case 16:                                \
-					(r) = (g) = (b) =               \
-						*((unsigned short *) buf);      \
-					buf += 2;                       \
-					break;                          \
-			}                                               \
-			break;                                          \
-									\
-									\
-		case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565:                              \
-		{                                                       \
-			unsigned short tmp = *(unsigned short *)buf;    \
-			(r) = tmp&0xF800;                               \
-			(g) = (tmp<<5)&0xFC00;                          \
-			(b) = (tmp<<11)&0xF800;                         \
-			buf += 2;                                       \
-		}                                                       \
-		break;                                                  \
-									\
-		case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555:                              \
-			(r) = (buf[0]&0xF8)<<8;                         \
-			(g) = ((buf[0] << 5 | buf[1] >> 3)&0xF8)<<8;    \
-			(b) = ((buf[1] << 2 ) & 0xF8)<<8;               \
-			buf += 2;                                       \
-			break;                                          \
-									\
-		case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24:                               \
-			(r) = buf[0] << 8; (g) = buf[1] << 8;           \
-			(b) = buf[2] << 8;                              \
-			buf += 3;                                       \
-			break;                                          \
-									\
-		default:                                                \
-			fprintf(stderr,                                 \
-				"Format %d not yet supported\n",        \
-				format);                                \
-	}                                                               \
-}
-
-static int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) {
-  long i, tot = 0;
-  for (i=0;i<size*3;i++)
-    tot += image[i];
-  *brightness = (128 - tot/(size*3))/3;
-  return !((tot/(size*3)) >= 126 && (tot/(size*3)) <= 130);
-}
-
-int main(int argc, char ** argv)
-{
-  int fd = open(VIDEO_DEV, O_RDONLY), f;
-  struct video_capability cap;
-  struct video_window win;
-  struct video_picture vpic;
-
-  unsigned char *buffer, *src;
-  int bpp = 24, r = 0, g = 0, b = 0;
-  unsigned int i, src_depth = 16;
-
-  if (fd < 0) {
-    perror(VIDEO_DEV);
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) {
-    perror("VIDIOGCAP");
-    fprintf(stderr, "(" VIDEO_DEV " not a video4linux device?)\n");
-    close(fd);
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGWIN, &win) < 0) {
-    perror("VIDIOCGWIN");
-    close(fd);
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
-    perror("VIDIOCGPICT");
-    close(fd);
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  if (cap.type & VID_TYPE_MONOCHROME) {
-    vpic.depth=8;
-    vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY;    /* 8bit grey */
-    if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
-      vpic.depth=6;
-      if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
-	vpic.depth=4;
-	if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
-	  fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n");
-	  close(fd);
-	  exit(1);
-	}
-      }
-    }
-  } else {
-    vpic.depth=24;
-    vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24;
-
-    if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
-      vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565;
-      vpic.depth=16;
-
-      if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
-	vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555;
-	vpic.depth=15;
-
-	if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
-	  fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n");
-	  return -1;
-	}
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  buffer = malloc(win.width * win.height * bpp);
-  if (!buffer) {
-    fprintf(stderr, "Out of memory.\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  do {
-    int newbright;
-    read(fd, buffer, win.width * win.height * bpp);
-    f = get_brightness_adj(buffer, win.width * win.height, &newbright);
-    if (f) {
-      vpic.brightness += (newbright << 8);
-      if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
-	perror("VIDIOSPICT");
-	break;
-      }
-    }
-  } while (f);
-
-  fprintf(stdout, "P6\n%d %d 255\n", win.width, win.height);
-
-  src = buffer;
-
-  for (i = 0; i < win.width * win.height; i++) {
-    READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(src, vpic.palette, src_depth, r, g, b);
-    fputc(r>>8, stdout);
-    fputc(g>>8, stdout);
-    fputc(b>>8, stdout);
-  }
-
-  close(fd);
-  return 0;
-}

Documentation/video4linux/videobuf

@@ -247,8 +247,6 @@ calls.  The relevant helper functions are:
 		       int nonblocking);
     int videobuf_streamon(struct videobuf_queue *q);
     int videobuf_streamoff(struct videobuf_queue *q);
-    int videobuf_cgmbuf(struct videobuf_queue *q, struct video_mbuf *mbuf,
-			int count);
 
 So, for example, a VIDIOC_REQBUFS call turns into a call to the driver's
 vidioc_reqbufs() callback which, in turn, usually only needs to locate the
@@ -258,10 +256,7 @@ boilerplate in a lot of V4L2 drivers.
 
 The vidioc_streamon() and vidioc_streamoff() functions will be a bit more
 complex, of course, since they will also need to deal with starting and
-stopping the capture engine.  videobuf_cgmbuf(), called from the driver's
-vidiocgmbuf() function, only exists if the V4L1 compatibility module has
-been selected with CONFIG_VIDEO_V4L1_COMPAT, so its use must be surrounded
-with #ifdef directives.
+stopping the capture engine.
 
 Buffer allocation
 

Documentation/vm/Makefile

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 obj- := dummy.o
 
 # List of programs to build
-hostprogs-y := slabinfo page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb
+hostprogs-y := page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb
 
 # Tell kbuild to always build the programs
 always := $(hostprogs-y)

Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c

@@ -1,1364 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * Slabinfo: Tool to get reports about slabs
- *
- * (C) 2007 sgi, Christoph Lameter
- *
- * Compile by:
- *
- * gcc -o slabinfo slabinfo.c
- */
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <dirent.h>
-#include <strings.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdarg.h>
-#include <getopt.h>
-#include <regex.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-
-#define MAX_SLABS 500
-#define MAX_ALIASES 500
-#define MAX_NODES 1024
-
-struct slabinfo {
-	char *name;
-	int alias;
-	int refs;
-	int aliases, align, cache_dma, cpu_slabs, destroy_by_rcu;
-	int hwcache_align, object_size, objs_per_slab;
-	int sanity_checks, slab_size, store_user, trace;
-	int order, poison, reclaim_account, red_zone;
-	unsigned long partial, objects, slabs, objects_partial, objects_total;
-	unsigned long alloc_fastpath, alloc_slowpath;
-	unsigned long free_fastpath, free_slowpath;
-	unsigned long free_frozen, free_add_partial, free_remove_partial;
-	unsigned long alloc_from_partial, alloc_slab, free_slab, alloc_refill;
-	unsigned long cpuslab_flush, deactivate_full, deactivate_empty;
-	unsigned long deactivate_to_head, deactivate_to_tail;
-	unsigned long deactivate_remote_frees, order_fallback;
-	int numa[MAX_NODES];
-	int numa_partial[MAX_NODES];
-} slabinfo[MAX_SLABS];
-
-struct aliasinfo {
-	char *name;
-	char *ref;
-	struct slabinfo *slab;
-} aliasinfo[MAX_ALIASES];
-
-int slabs = 0;
-int actual_slabs = 0;
-int aliases = 0;
-int alias_targets = 0;
-int highest_node = 0;
-
-char buffer[4096];
-
-int show_empty = 0;
-int show_report = 0;
-int show_alias = 0;
-int show_slab = 0;
-int skip_zero = 1;
-int show_numa = 0;
-int show_track = 0;
-int show_first_alias = 0;
-int validate = 0;
-int shrink = 0;
-int show_inverted = 0;
-int show_single_ref = 0;
-int show_totals = 0;
-int sort_size = 0;
-int sort_active = 0;
-int set_debug = 0;
-int show_ops = 0;
-int show_activity = 0;
-
-/* Debug options */
-int sanity = 0;
-int redzone = 0;
-int poison = 0;
-int tracking = 0;
-int tracing = 0;
-
-int page_size;
-
-regex_t pattern;
-
-static void fatal(const char *x, ...)
-{
-	va_list ap;
-
-	va_start(ap, x);
-	vfprintf(stderr, x, ap);
-	va_end(ap);
-	exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
-}
-
-static void usage(void)
-{
-	printf("slabinfo 5/7/2007. (c) 2007 sgi.\n\n"
-		"slabinfo [-ahnpvtsz] [-d debugopts] [slab-regexp]\n"
-		"-a|--aliases           Show aliases\n"
-		"-A|--activity          Most active slabs first\n"
-		"-d<options>|--debug=<options> Set/Clear Debug options\n"
-		"-D|--display-active    Switch line format to activity\n"
-		"-e|--empty             Show empty slabs\n"
-		"-f|--first-alias       Show first alias\n"
-		"-h|--help              Show usage information\n"
-		"-i|--inverted          Inverted list\n"
-		"-l|--slabs             Show slabs\n"
-		"-n|--numa              Show NUMA information\n"
-		"-o|--ops		Show kmem_cache_ops\n"
-		"-s|--shrink            Shrink slabs\n"
-		"-r|--report		Detailed report on single slabs\n"
-		"-S|--Size              Sort by size\n"
-		"-t|--tracking          Show alloc/free information\n"
-		"-T|--Totals            Show summary information\n"
-		"-v|--validate          Validate slabs\n"
-		"-z|--zero              Include empty slabs\n"
-		"-1|--1ref              Single reference\n"
-		"\nValid debug options (FZPUT may be combined)\n"
-		"a / A          Switch on all debug options (=FZUP)\n"
-		"-              Switch off all debug options\n"
-		"f / F          Sanity Checks (SLAB_DEBUG_FREE)\n"
-		"z / Z          Redzoning\n"
-		"p / P          Poisoning\n"
-		"u / U          Tracking\n"
-		"t / T          Tracing\n"
-	);
-}
-
-static unsigned long read_obj(const char *name)
-{
-	FILE *f = fopen(name, "r");
-
-	if (!f)
-		buffer[0] = 0;
-	else {
-		if (!fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), f))
-			buffer[0] = 0;
-		fclose(f);
-		if (buffer[strlen(buffer)] == '\n')
-			buffer[strlen(buffer)] = 0;
-	}
-	return strlen(buffer);
-}
-
-
-/*
- * Get the contents of an attribute
- */
-static unsigned long get_obj(const char *name)
-{
-	if (!read_obj(name))
-		return 0;
-
-	return atol(buffer);
-}
-
-static unsigned long get_obj_and_str(const char *name, char **x)
-{
-	unsigned long result = 0;
-	char *p;
-
-	*x = NULL;
-
-	if (!read_obj(name)) {
-		x = NULL;
-		return 0;
-	}
-	result = strtoul(buffer, &p, 10);
-	while (*p == ' ')
-		p++;
-	if (*p)
-		*x = strdup(p);
-	return result;
-}
-
-static void set_obj(struct slabinfo *s, const char *name, int n)
-{
-	char x[100];
-	FILE *f;
-
-	snprintf(x, 100, "%s/%s", s->name, name);
-	f = fopen(x, "w");
-	if (!f)
-		fatal("Cannot write to %s\n", x);
-
-	fprintf(f, "%d\n", n);
-	fclose(f);
-}
-
-static unsigned long read_slab_obj(struct slabinfo *s, const char *name)
-{
-	char x[100];
-	FILE *f;
-	size_t l;
-
-	snprintf(x, 100, "%s/%s", s->name, name);
-	f = fopen(x, "r");
-	if (!f) {
-		buffer[0] = 0;
-		l = 0;
-	} else {
-		l = fread(buffer, 1, sizeof(buffer), f);
-		buffer[l] = 0;
-		fclose(f);
-	}
-	return l;
-}
-
-
-/*
- * Put a size string together
- */
-static int store_size(char *buffer, unsigned long value)
-{
-	unsigned long divisor = 1;
-	char trailer = 0;
-	int n;
-
-	if (value > 1000000000UL) {
-		divisor = 100000000UL;
-		trailer = 'G';
-	} else if (value > 1000000UL) {
-		divisor = 100000UL;
-		trailer = 'M';
-	} else if (value > 1000UL) {
-		divisor = 100;
-		trailer = 'K';
-	}
-
-	value /= divisor;
-	n = sprintf(buffer, "%ld",value);
-	if (trailer) {
-		buffer[n] = trailer;
-		n++;
-		buffer[n] = 0;
-	}
-	if (divisor != 1) {
-		memmove(buffer + n - 2, buffer + n - 3, 4);
-		buffer[n-2] = '.';
-		n++;
-	}
-	return n;
-}
-
-static void decode_numa_list(int *numa, char *t)
-{
-	int node;
-	int nr;
-
-	memset(numa, 0, MAX_NODES * sizeof(int));
-
-	if (!t)
-		return;
-
-	while (*t == 'N') {
-		t++;
-		node = strtoul(t, &t, 10);
-		if (*t == '=') {
-			t++;
-			nr = strtoul(t, &t, 10);
-			numa[node] = nr;
-			if (node > highest_node)
-				highest_node = node;
-		}
-		while (*t == ' ')
-			t++;
-	}
-}
-
-static void slab_validate(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	set_obj(s, "validate", 1);
-}
-
-static void slab_shrink(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	set_obj(s, "shrink", 1);
-}
-
-int line = 0;
-
-static void first_line(void)
-{
-	if (show_activity)
-		printf("Name                   Objects      Alloc       Free   %%Fast Fallb O\n");
-	else
-		printf("Name                   Objects Objsize    Space "
-			"Slabs/Part/Cpu  O/S O %%Fr %%Ef Flg\n");
-}
-
-/*
- * Find the shortest alias of a slab
- */
-static struct aliasinfo *find_one_alias(struct slabinfo *find)
-{
-	struct aliasinfo *a;
-	struct aliasinfo *best = NULL;
-
-	for(a = aliasinfo;a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) {
-		if (a->slab == find &&
-			(!best || strlen(best->name) < strlen(a->name))) {
-				best = a;
-				if (strncmp(a->name,"kmall", 5) == 0)
-					return best;
-			}
-	}
-	return best;
-}
-
-static unsigned long slab_size(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	return 	s->slabs * (page_size << s->order);
-}
-
-static unsigned long slab_activity(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	return 	s->alloc_fastpath + s->free_fastpath +
-		s->alloc_slowpath + s->free_slowpath;
-}
-
-static void slab_numa(struct slabinfo *s, int mode)
-{
-	int node;
-
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	if (!highest_node) {
-		printf("\n%s: No NUMA information available.\n", s->name);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (skip_zero && !s->slabs)
-		return;
-
-	if (!line) {
-		printf("\n%-21s:", mode ? "NUMA nodes" : "Slab");
-		for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++)
-			printf(" %4d", node);
-		printf("\n----------------------");
-		for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++)
-			printf("-----");
-		printf("\n");
-	}
-	printf("%-21s ", mode ? "All slabs" : s->name);
-	for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) {
-		char b[20];
-
-		store_size(b, s->numa[node]);
-		printf(" %4s", b);
-	}
-	printf("\n");
-	if (mode) {
-		printf("%-21s ", "Partial slabs");
-		for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) {
-			char b[20];
-
-			store_size(b, s->numa_partial[node]);
-			printf(" %4s", b);
-		}
-		printf("\n");
-	}
-	line++;
-}
-
-static void show_tracking(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	printf("\n%s: Kernel object allocation\n", s->name);
-	printf("-----------------------------------------------------------------------\n");
-	if (read_slab_obj(s, "alloc_calls"))
-		printf(buffer);
-	else
-		printf("No Data\n");
-
-	printf("\n%s: Kernel object freeing\n", s->name);
-	printf("------------------------------------------------------------------------\n");
-	if (read_slab_obj(s, "free_calls"))
-		printf(buffer);
-	else
-		printf("No Data\n");
-
-}
-
-static void ops(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	if (read_slab_obj(s, "ops")) {
-		printf("\n%s: kmem_cache operations\n", s->name);
-		printf("--------------------------------------------\n");
-		printf(buffer);
-	} else
-		printf("\n%s has no kmem_cache operations\n", s->name);
-}
-
-static const char *onoff(int x)
-{
-	if (x)
-		return "On ";
-	return "Off";
-}
-
-static void slab_stats(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	unsigned long total_alloc;
-	unsigned long total_free;
-	unsigned long total;
-
-	if (!s->alloc_slab)
-		return;
-
-	total_alloc = s->alloc_fastpath + s->alloc_slowpath;
-	total_free = s->free_fastpath + s->free_slowpath;
-
-	if (!total_alloc)
-		return;
-
-	printf("\n");
-	printf("Slab Perf Counter       Alloc     Free %%Al %%Fr\n");
-	printf("--------------------------------------------------\n");
-	printf("Fastpath             %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n",
-		s->alloc_fastpath, s->free_fastpath,
-		s->alloc_fastpath * 100 / total_alloc,
-		s->free_fastpath * 100 / total_free);
-	printf("Slowpath             %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n",
-		total_alloc - s->alloc_fastpath, s->free_slowpath,
-		(total_alloc - s->alloc_fastpath) * 100 / total_alloc,
-		s->free_slowpath * 100 / total_free);
-	printf("Page Alloc           %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n",
-		s->alloc_slab, s->free_slab,
-		s->alloc_slab * 100 / total_alloc,
-		s->free_slab * 100 / total_free);
-	printf("Add partial          %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n",
-		s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail,
-		s->free_add_partial,
-		(s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail) * 100 / total_alloc,
-		s->free_add_partial * 100 / total_free);
-	printf("Remove partial       %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n",
-		s->alloc_from_partial, s->free_remove_partial,
-		s->alloc_from_partial * 100 / total_alloc,
-		s->free_remove_partial * 100 / total_free);
-
-	printf("RemoteObj/SlabFrozen %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n",
-		s->deactivate_remote_frees, s->free_frozen,
-		s->deactivate_remote_frees * 100 / total_alloc,
-		s->free_frozen * 100 / total_free);
-
-	printf("Total                %8lu %8lu\n\n", total_alloc, total_free);
-
-	if (s->cpuslab_flush)
-		printf("Flushes %8lu\n", s->cpuslab_flush);
-
-	if (s->alloc_refill)
-		printf("Refill %8lu\n", s->alloc_refill);
-
-	total = s->deactivate_full + s->deactivate_empty +
-			s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail;
-
-	if (total)
-		printf("Deactivate Full=%lu(%lu%%) Empty=%lu(%lu%%) "
-			"ToHead=%lu(%lu%%) ToTail=%lu(%lu%%)\n",
-			s->deactivate_full, (s->deactivate_full * 100) / total,
-			s->deactivate_empty, (s->deactivate_empty * 100) / total,
-			s->deactivate_to_head, (s->deactivate_to_head * 100) / total,
-			s->deactivate_to_tail, (s->deactivate_to_tail * 100) / total);
-}
-
-static void report(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	printf("\nSlabcache: %-20s  Aliases: %2d Order : %2d Objects: %lu\n",
-		s->name, s->aliases, s->order, s->objects);
-	if (s->hwcache_align)
-		printf("** Hardware cacheline aligned\n");
-	if (s->cache_dma)
-		printf("** Memory is allocated in a special DMA zone\n");
-	if (s->destroy_by_rcu)
-		printf("** Slabs are destroyed via RCU\n");
-	if (s->reclaim_account)
-		printf("** Reclaim accounting active\n");
-
-	printf("\nSizes (bytes)     Slabs              Debug                Memory\n");
-	printf("------------------------------------------------------------------------\n");
-	printf("Object : %7d  Total  : %7ld   Sanity Checks : %s  Total: %7ld\n",
-			s->object_size, s->slabs, onoff(s->sanity_checks),
-			s->slabs * (page_size << s->order));
-	printf("SlabObj: %7d  Full   : %7ld   Redzoning     : %s  Used : %7ld\n",
-			s->slab_size, s->slabs - s->partial - s->cpu_slabs,
-			onoff(s->red_zone), s->objects * s->object_size);
-	printf("SlabSiz: %7d  Partial: %7ld   Poisoning     : %s  Loss : %7ld\n",
-			page_size << s->order, s->partial, onoff(s->poison),
-			s->slabs * (page_size << s->order) - s->objects * s->object_size);
-	printf("Loss   : %7d  CpuSlab: %7d   Tracking      : %s  Lalig: %7ld\n",
-			s->slab_size - s->object_size, s->cpu_slabs, onoff(s->store_user),
-			(s->slab_size - s->object_size) * s->objects);
-	printf("Align  : %7d  Objects: %7d   Tracing       : %s  Lpadd: %7ld\n",
-			s->align, s->objs_per_slab, onoff(s->trace),
-			((page_size << s->order) - s->objs_per_slab * s->slab_size) *
-			s->slabs);
-
-	ops(s);
-	show_tracking(s);
-	slab_numa(s, 1);
-	slab_stats(s);
-}
-
-static void slabcache(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	char size_str[20];
-	char dist_str[40];
-	char flags[20];
-	char *p = flags;
-
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	if (actual_slabs == 1) {
-		report(s);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (skip_zero && !show_empty && !s->slabs)
-		return;
-
-	if (show_empty && s->slabs)
-		return;
-
-	store_size(size_str, slab_size(s));
-	snprintf(dist_str, 40, "%lu/%lu/%d", s->slabs - s->cpu_slabs,
-						s->partial, s->cpu_slabs);
-
-	if (!line++)
-		first_line();
-
-	if (s->aliases)
-		*p++ = '*';
-	if (s->cache_dma)
-		*p++ = 'd';
-	if (s->hwcache_align)
-		*p++ = 'A';
-	if (s->poison)
-		*p++ = 'P';
-	if (s->reclaim_account)
-		*p++ = 'a';
-	if (s->red_zone)
-		*p++ = 'Z';
-	if (s->sanity_checks)
-		*p++ = 'F';
-	if (s->store_user)
-		*p++ = 'U';
-	if (s->trace)
-		*p++ = 'T';
-
-	*p = 0;
-	if (show_activity) {
-		unsigned long total_alloc;
-		unsigned long total_free;
-
-		total_alloc = s->alloc_fastpath + s->alloc_slowpath;
-		total_free = s->free_fastpath + s->free_slowpath;
-
-		printf("%-21s %8ld %10ld %10ld %3ld %3ld %5ld %1d\n",
-			s->name, s->objects,
-			total_alloc, total_free,
-			total_alloc ? (s->alloc_fastpath * 100 / total_alloc) : 0,
-			total_free ? (s->free_fastpath * 100 / total_free) : 0,
-			s->order_fallback, s->order);
-	}
-	else
-		printf("%-21s %8ld %7d %8s %14s %4d %1d %3ld %3ld %s\n",
-			s->name, s->objects, s->object_size, size_str, dist_str,
-			s->objs_per_slab, s->order,
-			s->slabs ? (s->partial * 100) / s->slabs : 100,
-			s->slabs ? (s->objects * s->object_size * 100) /
-				(s->slabs * (page_size << s->order)) : 100,
-			flags);
-}
-
-/*
- * Analyze debug options. Return false if something is amiss.
- */
-static int debug_opt_scan(char *opt)
-{
-	if (!opt || !opt[0] || strcmp(opt, "-") == 0)
-		return 1;
-
-	if (strcasecmp(opt, "a") == 0) {
-		sanity = 1;
-		poison = 1;
-		redzone = 1;
-		tracking = 1;
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	for ( ; *opt; opt++)
-	 	switch (*opt) {
-		case 'F' : case 'f':
-			if (sanity)
-				return 0;
-			sanity = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'P' : case 'p':
-			if (poison)
-				return 0;
-			poison = 1;
-			break;
-
-		case 'Z' : case 'z':
-			if (redzone)
-				return 0;
-			redzone = 1;
-			break;
-
-		case 'U' : case 'u':
-			if (tracking)
-				return 0;
-			tracking = 1;
-			break;
-
-		case 'T' : case 't':
-			if (tracing)
-				return 0;
-			tracing = 1;
-			break;
-		default:
-			return 0;
-		}
-	return 1;
-}
-
-static int slab_empty(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	if (s->objects > 0)
-		return 0;
-
-	/*
-	 * We may still have slabs even if there are no objects. Shrinking will
-	 * remove them.
-	 */
-	if (s->slabs != 0)
-		set_obj(s, "shrink", 1);
-
-	return 1;
-}
-
-static void slab_debug(struct slabinfo *s)
-{
-	if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0)
-		return;
-
-	if (sanity && !s->sanity_checks) {
-		set_obj(s, "sanity", 1);
-	}
-	if (!sanity && s->sanity_checks) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "sanity", 0);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable sanity checks\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (redzone && !s->red_zone) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "red_zone", 1);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable redzoning\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (!redzone && s->red_zone) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "red_zone", 0);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable redzoning\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (poison && !s->poison) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "poison", 1);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable poisoning\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (!poison && s->poison) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "poison", 0);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable poisoning\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (tracking && !s->store_user) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "store_user", 1);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable tracking\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (!tracking && s->store_user) {
-		if (slab_empty(s))
-			set_obj(s, "store_user", 0);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable tracking\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (tracing && !s->trace) {
-		if (slabs == 1)
-			set_obj(s, "trace", 1);
-		else
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s can only enable trace for one slab at a time\n", s->name);
-	}
-	if (!tracing && s->trace)
-		set_obj(s, "trace", 1);
-}
-
-static void totals(void)
-{
-	struct slabinfo *s;
-
-	int used_slabs = 0;
-	char b1[20], b2[20], b3[20], b4[20];
-	unsigned long long max = 1ULL << 63;
-
-	/* Object size */
-	unsigned long long min_objsize = max, max_objsize = 0, avg_objsize;
-
-	/* Number of partial slabs in a slabcache */
-	unsigned long long min_partial = max, max_partial = 0,
-				avg_partial, total_partial = 0;
-
-	/* Number of slabs in a slab cache */
-	unsigned long long min_slabs = max, max_slabs = 0,
-				avg_slabs, total_slabs = 0;
-
-	/* Size of the whole slab */
-	unsigned long long min_size = max, max_size = 0,
-				avg_size, total_size = 0;
-
-	/* Bytes used for object storage in a slab */
-	unsigned long long min_used = max, max_used = 0,
-				avg_used, total_used = 0;
-
-	/* Waste: Bytes used for alignment and padding */
-	unsigned long long min_waste = max, max_waste = 0,
-				avg_waste, total_waste = 0;
-	/* Number of objects in a slab */
-	unsigned long long min_objects = max, max_objects = 0,
-				avg_objects, total_objects = 0;
-	/* Waste per object */
-	unsigned long long min_objwaste = max,
-				max_objwaste = 0, avg_objwaste,
-				total_objwaste = 0;
-
-	/* Memory per object */
-	unsigned long long min_memobj = max,
-				max_memobj = 0, avg_memobj,
-				total_objsize = 0;
-
-	/* Percentage of partial slabs per slab */
-	unsigned long min_ppart = 100, max_ppart = 0,
-				avg_ppart, total_ppart = 0;
-
-	/* Number of objects in partial slabs */
-	unsigned long min_partobj = max, max_partobj = 0,
-				avg_partobj, total_partobj = 0;
-
-	/* Percentage of partial objects of all objects in a slab */
-	unsigned long min_ppartobj = 100, max_ppartobj = 0,
-				avg_ppartobj, total_ppartobj = 0;
-
-
-	for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) {
-		unsigned long long size;
-		unsigned long used;
-		unsigned long long wasted;
-		unsigned long long objwaste;
-		unsigned long percentage_partial_slabs;
-		unsigned long percentage_partial_objs;
-
-		if (!s->slabs || !s->objects)
-			continue;
-
-		used_slabs++;
-
-		size = slab_size(s);
-		used = s->objects * s->object_size;
-		wasted = size - used;
-		objwaste = s->slab_size - s->object_size;
-
-		percentage_partial_slabs = s->partial * 100 / s->slabs;
-		if (percentage_partial_slabs > 100)
-			percentage_partial_slabs = 100;
-
-		percentage_partial_objs = s->objects_partial * 100
-							/ s->objects;
-
-		if (percentage_partial_objs > 100)
-			percentage_partial_objs = 100;
-
-		if (s->object_size < min_objsize)
-			min_objsize = s->object_size;
-		if (s->partial < min_partial)
-			min_partial = s->partial;
-		if (s->slabs < min_slabs)
-			min_slabs = s->slabs;
-		if (size < min_size)
-			min_size = size;
-		if (wasted < min_waste)
-			min_waste = wasted;
-		if (objwaste < min_objwaste)
-			min_objwaste = objwaste;
-		if (s->objects < min_objects)
-			min_objects = s->objects;
-		if (used < min_used)
-			min_used = used;
-		if (s->objects_partial < min_partobj)
-			min_partobj = s->objects_partial;
-		if (percentage_partial_slabs < min_ppart)
-			min_ppart = percentage_partial_slabs;
-		if (percentage_partial_objs < min_ppartobj)
-			min_ppartobj = percentage_partial_objs;
-		if (s->slab_size < min_memobj)
-			min_memobj = s->slab_size;
-
-		if (s->object_size > max_objsize)
-			max_objsize = s->object_size;
-		if (s->partial > max_partial)
-			max_partial = s->partial;
-		if (s->slabs > max_slabs)
-			max_slabs = s->slabs;
-		if (size > max_size)
-			max_size = size;
-		if (wasted > max_waste)
-			max_waste = wasted;
-		if (objwaste > max_objwaste)
-			max_objwaste = objwaste;
-		if (s->objects > max_objects)
-			max_objects = s->objects;
-		if (used > max_used)
-			max_used = used;
-		if (s->objects_partial > max_partobj)
-			max_partobj = s->objects_partial;
-		if (percentage_partial_slabs > max_ppart)
-			max_ppart = percentage_partial_slabs;
-		if (percentage_partial_objs > max_ppartobj)
-			max_ppartobj = percentage_partial_objs;
-		if (s->slab_size > max_memobj)
-			max_memobj = s->slab_size;
-
-		total_partial += s->partial;
-		total_slabs += s->slabs;
-		total_size += size;
-		total_waste += wasted;
-
-		total_objects += s->objects;
-		total_used += used;
-		total_partobj += s->objects_partial;
-		total_ppart += percentage_partial_slabs;
-		total_ppartobj += percentage_partial_objs;
-
-		total_objwaste += s->objects * objwaste;
-		total_objsize += s->objects * s->slab_size;
-	}
-
-	if (!total_objects) {
-		printf("No objects\n");
-		return;
-	}
-	if (!used_slabs) {
-		printf("No slabs\n");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	/* Per slab averages */
-	avg_partial = total_partial / used_slabs;
-	avg_slabs = total_slabs / used_slabs;
-	avg_size = total_size / used_slabs;
-	avg_waste = total_waste / used_slabs;
-
-	avg_objects = total_objects / used_slabs;
-	avg_used = total_used / used_slabs;
-	avg_partobj = total_partobj / used_slabs;
-	avg_ppart = total_ppart / used_slabs;
-	avg_ppartobj = total_ppartobj / used_slabs;
-
-	/* Per object object sizes */
-	avg_objsize = total_used / total_objects;
-	avg_objwaste = total_objwaste / total_objects;
-	avg_partobj = total_partobj * 100 / total_objects;
-	avg_memobj = total_objsize / total_objects;
-
-	printf("Slabcache Totals\n");
-	printf("----------------\n");
-	printf("Slabcaches : %3d      Aliases  : %3d->%-3d Active: %3d\n",
-			slabs, aliases, alias_targets, used_slabs);
-
-	store_size(b1, total_size);store_size(b2, total_waste);
-	store_size(b3, total_waste * 100 / total_used);
-	printf("Memory used: %6s   # Loss   : %6s   MRatio:%6s%%\n", b1, b2, b3);
-
-	store_size(b1, total_objects);store_size(b2, total_partobj);
-	store_size(b3, total_partobj * 100 / total_objects);
-	printf("# Objects  : %6s   # PartObj: %6s   ORatio:%6s%%\n", b1, b2, b3);
-
-	printf("\n");
-	printf("Per Cache    Average         Min         Max       Total\n");
-	printf("---------------------------------------------------------\n");
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_objects);store_size(b2, min_objects);
-	store_size(b3, max_objects);store_size(b4, total_objects);
-	printf("#Objects  %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_slabs);store_size(b2, min_slabs);
-	store_size(b3, max_slabs);store_size(b4, total_slabs);
-	printf("#Slabs    %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_partial);store_size(b2, min_partial);
-	store_size(b3, max_partial);store_size(b4, total_partial);
-	printf("#PartSlab %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-	store_size(b1, avg_ppart);store_size(b2, min_ppart);
-	store_size(b3, max_ppart);
-	store_size(b4, total_partial * 100  / total_slabs);
-	printf("%%PartSlab%10s%% %10s%% %10s%% %10s%%\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_partobj);store_size(b2, min_partobj);
-	store_size(b3, max_partobj);
-	store_size(b4, total_partobj);
-	printf("PartObjs  %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_ppartobj);store_size(b2, min_ppartobj);
-	store_size(b3, max_ppartobj);
-	store_size(b4, total_partobj * 100 / total_objects);
-	printf("%% PartObj%10s%% %10s%% %10s%% %10s%%\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_size);store_size(b2, min_size);
-	store_size(b3, max_size);store_size(b4, total_size);
-	printf("Memory    %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_used);store_size(b2, min_used);
-	store_size(b3, max_used);store_size(b4, total_used);
-	printf("Used      %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_waste);store_size(b2, min_waste);
-	store_size(b3, max_waste);store_size(b4, total_waste);
-	printf("Loss      %10s  %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3,	b4);
-
-	printf("\n");
-	printf("Per Object   Average         Min         Max\n");
-	printf("---------------------------------------------\n");
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_memobj);store_size(b2, min_memobj);
-	store_size(b3, max_memobj);
-	printf("Memory    %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3);
-	store_size(b1, avg_objsize);store_size(b2, min_objsize);
-	store_size(b3, max_objsize);
-	printf("User      %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3);
-
-	store_size(b1, avg_objwaste);store_size(b2, min_objwaste);
-	store_size(b3, max_objwaste);
-	printf("Loss      %10s  %10s  %10s\n",
-			b1,	b2,	b3);
-}
-
-static void sort_slabs(void)
-{
-	struct slabinfo *s1,*s2;
-
-	for (s1 = slabinfo; s1 < slabinfo + slabs; s1++) {
-		for (s2 = s1 + 1; s2 < slabinfo + slabs; s2++) {
-			int result;
-
-			if (sort_size)
-				result = slab_size(s1) < slab_size(s2);
-			else if (sort_active)
-				result = slab_activity(s1) < slab_activity(s2);
-			else
-				result = strcasecmp(s1->name, s2->name);
-
-			if (show_inverted)
-				result = -result;
-
-			if (result > 0) {
-				struct slabinfo t;
-
-				memcpy(&t, s1, sizeof(struct slabinfo));
-				memcpy(s1, s2, sizeof(struct slabinfo));
-				memcpy(s2, &t, sizeof(struct slabinfo));
-			}
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-static void sort_aliases(void)
-{
-	struct aliasinfo *a1,*a2;
-
-	for (a1 = aliasinfo; a1 < aliasinfo + aliases; a1++) {
-		for (a2 = a1 + 1; a2 < aliasinfo + aliases; a2++) {
-			char *n1, *n2;
-
-			n1 = a1->name;
-			n2 = a2->name;
-			if (show_alias && !show_inverted) {
-				n1 = a1->ref;
-				n2 = a2->ref;
-			}
-			if (strcasecmp(n1, n2) > 0) {
-				struct aliasinfo t;
-
-				memcpy(&t, a1, sizeof(struct aliasinfo));
-				memcpy(a1, a2, sizeof(struct aliasinfo));
-				memcpy(a2, &t, sizeof(struct aliasinfo));
-			}
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-static void link_slabs(void)
-{
-	struct aliasinfo *a;
-	struct slabinfo *s;
-
-	for (a = aliasinfo; a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) {
-
-		for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++)
-			if (strcmp(a->ref, s->name) == 0) {
-				a->slab = s;
-				s->refs++;
-				break;
-			}
-		if (s == slabinfo + slabs)
-			fatal("Unresolved alias %s\n", a->ref);
-	}
-}
-
-static void alias(void)
-{
-	struct aliasinfo *a;
-	char *active = NULL;
-
-	sort_aliases();
-	link_slabs();
-
-	for(a = aliasinfo; a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) {
-
-		if (!show_single_ref && a->slab->refs == 1)
-			continue;
-
-		if (!show_inverted) {
-			if (active) {
-				if (strcmp(a->slab->name, active) == 0) {
-					printf(" %s", a->name);
-					continue;
-				}
-			}
-			printf("\n%-12s <- %s", a->slab->name, a->name);
-			active = a->slab->name;
-		}
-		else
-			printf("%-20s -> %s\n", a->name, a->slab->name);
-	}
-	if (active)
-		printf("\n");
-}
-
-
-static void rename_slabs(void)
-{
-	struct slabinfo *s;
-	struct aliasinfo *a;
-
-	for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) {
-		if (*s->name != ':')
-			continue;
-
-		if (s->refs > 1 && !show_first_alias)
-			continue;
-
-		a = find_one_alias(s);
-
-		if (a)
-			s->name = a->name;
-		else {
-			s->name = "*";
-			actual_slabs--;
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-static int slab_mismatch(char *slab)
-{
-	return regexec(&pattern, slab, 0, NULL, 0);
-}
-
-static void read_slab_dir(void)
-{
-	DIR *dir;
-	struct dirent *de;
-	struct slabinfo *slab = slabinfo;
-	struct aliasinfo *alias = aliasinfo;
-	char *p;
-	char *t;
-	int count;
-
-	if (chdir("/sys/kernel/slab") && chdir("/sys/slab"))
-		fatal("SYSFS support for SLUB not active\n");
-
-	dir = opendir(".");
-	while ((de = readdir(dir))) {
-		if (de->d_name[0] == '.' ||
-			(de->d_name[0] != ':' && slab_mismatch(de->d_name)))
-				continue;
-		switch (de->d_type) {
-		   case DT_LNK:
-		   	alias->name = strdup(de->d_name);
-			count = readlink(de->d_name, buffer, sizeof(buffer));
-
-			if (count < 0)
-				fatal("Cannot read symlink %s\n", de->d_name);
-
-			buffer[count] = 0;
-			p = buffer + count;
-			while (p > buffer && p[-1] != '/')
-				p--;
-			alias->ref = strdup(p);
-			alias++;
-			break;
-		   case DT_DIR:
-			if (chdir(de->d_name))
-				fatal("Unable to access slab %s\n", slab->name);
-		   	slab->name = strdup(de->d_name);
-			slab->alias = 0;
-			slab->refs = 0;
-			slab->aliases = get_obj("aliases");
-			slab->align = get_obj("align");
-			slab->cache_dma = get_obj("cache_dma");
-			slab->cpu_slabs = get_obj("cpu_slabs");
-			slab->destroy_by_rcu = get_obj("destroy_by_rcu");
-			slab->hwcache_align = get_obj("hwcache_align");
-			slab->object_size = get_obj("object_size");
-			slab->objects = get_obj("objects");
-			slab->objects_partial = get_obj("objects_partial");
-			slab->objects_total = get_obj("objects_total");
-			slab->objs_per_slab = get_obj("objs_per_slab");
-			slab->order = get_obj("order");
-			slab->partial = get_obj("partial");
-			slab->partial = get_obj_and_str("partial", &t);
-			decode_numa_list(slab->numa_partial, t);
-			free(t);
-			slab->poison = get_obj("poison");
-			slab->reclaim_account = get_obj("reclaim_account");
-			slab->red_zone = get_obj("red_zone");
-			slab->sanity_checks = get_obj("sanity_checks");
-			slab->slab_size = get_obj("slab_size");
-			slab->slabs = get_obj_and_str("slabs", &t);
-			decode_numa_list(slab->numa, t);
-			free(t);
-			slab->store_user = get_obj("store_user");
-			slab->trace = get_obj("trace");
-			slab->alloc_fastpath = get_obj("alloc_fastpath");
-			slab->alloc_slowpath = get_obj("alloc_slowpath");
-			slab->free_fastpath = get_obj("free_fastpath");
-			slab->free_slowpath = get_obj("free_slowpath");
-			slab->free_frozen= get_obj("free_frozen");
-			slab->free_add_partial = get_obj("free_add_partial");
-			slab->free_remove_partial = get_obj("free_remove_partial");
-			slab->alloc_from_partial = get_obj("alloc_from_partial");
-			slab->alloc_slab = get_obj("alloc_slab");
-			slab->alloc_refill = get_obj("alloc_refill");
-			slab->free_slab = get_obj("free_slab");
-			slab->cpuslab_flush = get_obj("cpuslab_flush");
-			slab->deactivate_full = get_obj("deactivate_full");
-			slab->deactivate_empty = get_obj("deactivate_empty");
-			slab->deactivate_to_head = get_obj("deactivate_to_head");
-			slab->deactivate_to_tail = get_obj("deactivate_to_tail");
-			slab->deactivate_remote_frees = get_obj("deactivate_remote_frees");
-			slab->order_fallback = get_obj("order_fallback");
-			chdir("..");
-			if (slab->name[0] == ':')
-				alias_targets++;
-			slab++;
-			break;
-		   default :
-			fatal("Unknown file type %lx\n", de->d_type);
-		}
-	}
-	closedir(dir);
-	slabs = slab - slabinfo;
-	actual_slabs = slabs;
-	aliases = alias - aliasinfo;
-	if (slabs > MAX_SLABS)
-		fatal("Too many slabs\n");
-	if (aliases > MAX_ALIASES)
-		fatal("Too many aliases\n");
-}
-
-static void output_slabs(void)
-{
-	struct slabinfo *slab;
-
-	for (slab = slabinfo; slab < slabinfo + slabs; slab++) {
-
-		if (slab->alias)
-			continue;
-
-
-		if (show_numa)
-			slab_numa(slab, 0);
-		else if (show_track)
-			show_tracking(slab);
-		else if (validate)
-			slab_validate(slab);
-		else if (shrink)
-			slab_shrink(slab);
-		else if (set_debug)
-			slab_debug(slab);
-		else if (show_ops)
-			ops(slab);
-		else if (show_slab)
-			slabcache(slab);
-		else if (show_report)
-			report(slab);
-	}
-}
-
-struct option opts[] = {
-	{ "aliases", 0, NULL, 'a' },
-	{ "activity", 0, NULL, 'A' },
-	{ "debug", 2, NULL, 'd' },
-	{ "display-activity", 0, NULL, 'D' },
-	{ "empty", 0, NULL, 'e' },
-	{ "first-alias", 0, NULL, 'f' },
-	{ "help", 0, NULL, 'h' },
-	{ "inverted", 0, NULL, 'i'},
-	{ "numa", 0, NULL, 'n' },
-	{ "ops", 0, NULL, 'o' },
-	{ "report", 0, NULL, 'r' },
-	{ "shrink", 0, NULL, 's' },
-	{ "slabs", 0, NULL, 'l' },
-	{ "track", 0, NULL, 't'},
-	{ "validate", 0, NULL, 'v' },
-	{ "zero", 0, NULL, 'z' },
-	{ "1ref", 0, NULL, '1'},
-	{ NULL, 0, NULL, 0 }
-};
-
-int main(int argc, char *argv[])
-{
-	int c;
-	int err;
-	char *pattern_source;
-
-	page_size = getpagesize();
-
-	while ((c = getopt_long(argc, argv, "aAd::Defhil1noprstvzTS",
-						opts, NULL)) != -1)
-		switch (c) {
-		case '1':
-			show_single_ref = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'a':
-			show_alias = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'A':
-			sort_active = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'd':
-			set_debug = 1;
-			if (!debug_opt_scan(optarg))
-				fatal("Invalid debug option '%s'\n", optarg);
-			break;
-		case 'D':
-			show_activity = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'e':
-			show_empty = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'f':
-			show_first_alias = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'h':
-			usage();
-			return 0;
-		case 'i':
-			show_inverted = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'n':
-			show_numa = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'o':
-			show_ops = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'r':
-			show_report = 1;
-			break;
-		case 's':
-			shrink = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'l':
-			show_slab = 1;
-			break;
-		case 't':
-			show_track = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'v':
-			validate = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'z':
-			skip_zero = 0;
-			break;
-		case 'T':
-			show_totals = 1;
-			break;
-		case 'S':
-			sort_size = 1;
-			break;
-
-		default:
-			fatal("%s: Invalid option '%c'\n", argv[0], optopt);
-
-	}
-
-	if (!show_slab && !show_alias && !show_track && !show_report
-		&& !validate && !shrink && !set_debug && !show_ops)
-			show_slab = 1;
-
-	if (argc > optind)
-		pattern_source = argv[optind];
-	else
-		pattern_source = ".*";
-
-	err = regcomp(&pattern, pattern_source, REG_ICASE|REG_NOSUB);
-	if (err)
-		fatal("%s: Invalid pattern '%s' code %d\n",
-			argv[0], pattern_source, err);
-	read_slab_dir();
-	if (show_alias)
-		alias();
-	else
-	if (show_totals)
-		totals();
-	else {
-		link_slabs();
-		rename_slabs();
-		sort_slabs();
-		output_slabs();
-	}
-	return 0;
-}

Documentation/x86/boot.txt

@@ -600,6 +600,7 @@ Protocol:	2.07+
   0x00000001	lguest
   0x00000002	Xen
   0x00000003	Moorestown MID
+  0x00000004	CE4100 TV Platform
 
 Field name:	hardware_subarch_data
 Type:		write (subarch-dependent)

MAINTAINERS

@@ -166,9 +166,8 @@ F:	drivers/serial/8250*
 F:	include/linux/serial_8250.h
 
 8390 NETWORK DRIVERS [WD80x3/SMC-ELITE, SMC-ULTRA, NE2000, 3C503, etc.]
-M:	Paul Gortmaker <p_gortmaker@yahoo.com>
 L:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
-S:	Maintained
+S:	Orphan / Obsolete
 F:	drivers/net/*8390*
 F:	drivers/net/ax88796.c
 
@@ -286,6 +285,41 @@ L:	linux-parisc@vger.kernel.org
 S:	Maintained
 F:	sound/pci/ad1889.*
 
+AD525X ANALOG DEVICES DIGITAL POTENTIOMETERS DRIVER
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/AD5254
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/misc/ad525x_dpot.c
+
+AD5398 CURRENT REGULATOR DRIVER (AD5398/AD5821)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/AD5398
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/regulator/ad5398.c
+
+AD714X CAPACITANCE TOUCH SENSOR DRIVER (AD7142/3/7/8/7A)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/AD7142
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/input/misc/ad714x.c
+
+AD7877 TOUCHSCREEN DRIVER
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/AD7877
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/input/touchscreen/ad7877.c
+
+AD7879 TOUCHSCREEN DRIVER (AD7879/AD7889)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/AD7879
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/input/touchscreen/ad7879.c
+
 ADM1025 HARDWARE MONITOR DRIVER
 M:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 L:	lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
@@ -305,6 +339,32 @@ W:	http://linuxwireless.org/
 S:	Orphan
 F:	drivers/net/wireless/adm8211.*
 
+ADP5520 BACKLIGHT DRIVER WITH IO EXPANDER (ADP5520/ADP5501)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/ADP5520
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/mfd/adp5520.c
+F:	drivers/video/backlight/adp5520_bl.c
+F:	drivers/led/leds-adp5520.c
+F:	drivers/gpio/adp5520-gpio.c
+F:	drivers/input/keyboard/adp5520-keys.c
+
+ADP5588 QWERTY KEYPAD AND IO EXPANDER DRIVER (ADP5588/ADP5587)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/ADP5588
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/input/keyboard/adp5588-keys.c
+F:	drivers/gpio/adp5588-gpio.c
+
+ADP8860 BACKLIGHT DRIVER (ADP8860/ADP8861/ADP8863)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/ADP8860
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/video/backlight/adp8860_bl.c
+
 ADT746X FAN DRIVER
 M:	Colin Leroy <colin@colino.net>
 S:	Maintained
@@ -317,6 +377,13 @@ S:	Maintained
 F:	Documentation/hwmon/adt7475
 F:	drivers/hwmon/adt7475.c
 
+ADXL34X THREE-AXIS DIGITAL ACCELEROMETER DRIVER (ADXL345/ADXL346)
+M:	Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com>
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/ADXL345
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/input/misc/adxl34x.c
+
 ADVANSYS SCSI DRIVER
 M:	Matthew Wilcox <matthew@wil.cx>
 L:	linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
@@ -441,17 +508,23 @@ L:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
 S:	Maintained
 F:	drivers/infiniband/hw/amso1100/
 
-ANALOG DEVICES INC ASOC DRIVERS
-L:	uclinux-dist-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+ANALOG DEVICES INC ASOC CODEC DRIVERS
+L:	device-driver-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
 L:	alsa-devel@alsa-project.org (moderated for non-subscribers)
-W:	http://blackfin.uclinux.org/
+W:	http://wiki-analog.com/
 S:	Supported
-F:	sound/soc/blackfin/*
 F:	sound/soc/codecs/ad1*
 F:	sound/soc/codecs/adau*
 F:	sound/soc/codecs/adav*
 F:	sound/soc/codecs/ssm*
 
+ANALOG DEVICES INC ASOC DRIVERS
+L:	uclinux-dist-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org
+L:	alsa-devel@alsa-project.org (moderated for non-subscribers)
+W:	http://blackfin.uclinux.org/
+S:	Supported
+F:	sound/soc/blackfin/*
+
 AOA (Apple Onboard Audio) ALSA DRIVER
 M:	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
 L:	linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
@@ -1095,6 +1168,12 @@ S:	Supported
 F:	Documentation/aoe/
 F:	drivers/block/aoe/
 
+ATHEROS ATH GENERIC UTILITIES
+M:	"Luis R. Rodriguez" <lrodriguez@atheros.com>
+L:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/net/wireless/ath/*
+
 ATHEROS ATH5K WIRELESS DRIVER
 M:	Jiri Slaby <jirislaby@gmail.com>
 M:	Nick Kossifidis <mickflemm@gmail.com>
@@ -1273,6 +1352,15 @@ S:	Maintained
 F:	drivers/video/backlight/
 F:	include/linux/backlight.h
 
+BATMAN ADVANCED
+M:	Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+M:	Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
+M:	Sven Eckelmann <sven@narfation.org>
+L:	b.a.t.m.a.n@lists.open-mesh.org
+W:	http://www.open-mesh.org/
+S:	Maintained
+F:	net/batman-adv/
+
 BAYCOM/HDLCDRV DRIVERS FOR AX.25
 M:	Thomas Sailer <t.sailer@alumni.ethz.ch>
 L:	linux-hams@vger.kernel.org
@@ -1409,7 +1497,9 @@ F:	drivers/net/tg3.*
 BROADCOM BRCM80211 IEEE802.11n WIRELESS DRIVER
 M:	Brett Rudley <brudley@broadcom.com>
 M:	Henry Ptasinski <henryp@broadcom.com>
-M:	Nohee Ko <noheek@broadcom.com>
+M:	Dowan Kim <dowan@broadcom.com>
+M:	Roland Vossen <rvossen@broadcom.com>
+M:	Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
 L:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
 S:	Supported
 F:	drivers/staging/brcm80211/
@@ -1695,7 +1785,8 @@ S:	Maintained
 F:	drivers/usb/atm/cxacru.c
 
 CONFIGFS
-M:	Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
+M:	Joel Becker <jlbec@evilplan.org>
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jlbec/configfs.git
 S:	Supported
 F:	fs/configfs/
 F:	include/linux/configfs.h
@@ -2257,6 +2348,14 @@ W:	http://acpi4asus.sf.net
 S:	Maintained
 F:	drivers/platform/x86/eeepc-laptop.c
 
+EEEPC WMI EXTRAS DRIVER
+M:	Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
+L:	acpi4asus-user@lists.sourceforge.net
+L:	platform-driver-x86@vger.kernel.org
+W:	http://acpi4asus.sf.net
+S:	Maintained
+F:	drivers/platform/x86/eeepc-wmi.c
+
 EFIFB FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
 L:	linux-fbdev@vger.kernel.org
 M:	Peter Jones <pjones@redhat.com>
@@ -2594,6 +2693,14 @@ S:	Supported
 F:	drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-gpio.c
 F:	include/linux/i2c-gpio.h
 
+GENERIC GPIO I2C MULTIPLEXER DRIVER
+M:	Peter Korsgaard <peter.korsgaard@barco.com>
+L:	linux-i2c@vger.kernel.org
+S:	Supported
+F:	drivers/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux.c
+F:	include/linux/gpio-i2cmux.h
+F:	Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux
+
 GENERIC HDLC (WAN) DRIVERS
 M:	Krzysztof Halasa <khc@pm.waw.pl>
 W:	http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/
@@ -2812,6 +2919,10 @@ M:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
 S:	Maintained
 F:	Documentation/timers/
 F:	kernel/hrtimer.c
+F:	kernel/time/clockevents.c
+F:	kernel/time/tick*.*
+F:	kernel/time/timer_*.c
+F	include/linux/clockevents.h
 F:	include/linux/hrtimer.h
 
 HIGH-SPEED SCC DRIVER FOR AX.25
@@ -3047,8 +3158,10 @@ F:	drivers/input/
 INPUT MULTITOUCH (MT) PROTOCOL
 M:	Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se>
 L:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/rydberg/input-mt.git
 S:	Maintained
 F:	Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt
+F:	drivers/input/input-mt.c
 K:	\b(ABS|SYN)_MT_
 
 INTEL IDLE DRIVER
@@ -3135,6 +3248,8 @@ M:	Alex Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com>
 M:	John Ronciak <john.ronciak@intel.com>
 L:	e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
 W:	http://e1000.sourceforge.net/
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jkirsher/net-2.6.git
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jkirsher/net-next-2.6.git
 S:	Supported
 F:	Documentation/networking/e100.txt
 F:	Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
@@ -4246,6 +4361,7 @@ NILFS2 FILESYSTEM
 M:	KONISHI Ryusuke <konishi.ryusuke@lab.ntt.co.jp>
 L:	linux-nilfs@vger.kernel.org
 W:	http://www.nilfs.org/en/
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/ryusuke/nilfs2.git
 S:	Supported
 F:	Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt
 F:	fs/nilfs2/
@@ -4267,11 +4383,11 @@ F:	Documentation/scsi/NinjaSCSI.txt
 F:	drivers/scsi/nsp32*
 
 NTFS FILESYSTEM
-M:	Anton Altaparmakov <aia21@cantab.net>
+M:	Anton Altaparmakov <anton@tuxera.com>
 L:	linux-ntfs-dev@lists.sourceforge.net
-W:	http://www.linux-ntfs.org/
+W:	http://www.tuxera.com/
 T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aia21/ntfs-2.6.git
-S:	Maintained
+S:	Supported
 F:	Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
 F:	fs/ntfs/
 
@@ -4343,6 +4459,20 @@ M:	Deepak Saxena <dsaxena@plexity.net>
 S:	Maintained
 F:	drivers/char/hw_random/omap-rng.c
 
+OMAP HWMOD SUPPORT
+M:	Benoît Cousson <b-cousson@ti.com>
+M:	Paul Walmsley <paul@pwsan.com>
+L:	linux-omap@vger.kernel.org
+S:	Maintained
+F:	arch/arm/mach-omap2/omap_hwmod.c
+F:	arch/arm/plat-omap/include/plat/omap_hwmod.h
+
+OMAP HWMOD DATA FOR OMAP4-BASED DEVICES
+M:	Benoît Cousson <b-cousson@ti.com>
+L:	linux-omap@vger.kernel.org
+S:	Maintained
+F:	arch/arm/mach-omap2/omap_hwmod_44xx_data.c
+
 OMAP USB SUPPORT
 M:	Felipe Balbi <balbi@ti.com>
 M:	David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -4420,7 +4550,7 @@ F:	include/linux/oprofile.h
 
 ORACLE CLUSTER FILESYSTEM 2 (OCFS2)
 M:	Mark Fasheh <mfasheh@suse.com>
-M:	Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
+M:	Joel Becker <jlbec@evilplan.org>
 L:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com (moderated for non-subscribers)
 W:	http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2/
 T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jlbec/ocfs2.git
@@ -4617,6 +4747,16 @@ S:	Maintained
 F:	crypto/pcrypt.c
 F:	include/crypto/pcrypt.h
 
+PER-CPU MEMORY ALLOCATOR
+M:	Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org>
+M:	Christoph Lameter <cl@linux-foundation.org>
+L:	linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tj/percpu.git
+S:	Maintained
+F:	include/linux/percpu*.h
+F:	mm/percpu*.c
+F:	arch/*/include/asm/percpu.h
+
 PER-TASK DELAY ACCOUNTING
 M:	Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
 S:	Maintained
@@ -4627,7 +4767,7 @@ PERFORMANCE EVENTS SUBSYSTEM
 M:	Peter Zijlstra <a.p.zijlstra@chello.nl>
 M:	Paul Mackerras <paulus@samba.org>
 M:	Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
-M:	Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo <acme@redhat.com>
+M:	Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo <acme@ghostprotocols.net>
 S:	Supported
 F:	kernel/perf_event*.c
 F:	include/linux/perf_event.h
@@ -5052,7 +5192,7 @@ L:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
 W:	http://linuxwireless.org/
 T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/linville/wireless-testing.git
 S:	Maintained
-F:	drivers/net/wireless/rtl818x/rtl8180*
+F:	drivers/net/wireless/rtl818x/rtl8180/
 
 RTL8187 WIRELESS DRIVER
 M:	Herton Ronaldo Krzesinski <herton@mandriva.com.br>
@@ -5062,7 +5202,17 @@ L:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
 W:	http://linuxwireless.org/
 T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/linville/wireless-testing.git
 S:	Maintained
-F:	drivers/net/wireless/rtl818x/rtl8187*
+F:	drivers/net/wireless/rtl818x/rtl8187/
+
+RTL8192CE WIRELESS DRIVER
+M:	Larry Finger <Larry.Finger@lwfinger.net>
+M:	Chaoming Li <chaoming_li@realsil.com.cn>
+L:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+W:	http://linuxwireless.org/
+T:	git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/linville/wireless-testing.git
+S:	Maintained
+F:	drivers/net/wireless/rtlwifi/
+F:	drivers/net/wireless/rtlwifi/rtl8192ce/
 
 S3 SAVAGE FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
 M:	Antonino Daplas <adaplas@gmail.com>
@@ -5142,6 +5292,18 @@ L:	alsa-devel@alsa-project.org (moderated for non-subscribers)
 S:	Supported
 F:	sound/soc/s3c24xx
 
+TIMEKEEPING, NTP
+M:	John Stultz <johnstul@us.ibm.com>
+M:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
+S:	Supported
+F:	include/linux/clocksource.h
+F:	include/linux/time.h
+F:	include/linux/timex.h
+F:	include/linux/timekeeping.h
+F:	kernel/time/clocksource.c
+F:	kernel/time/time*.c
+F:	kernel/time/ntp.c
+
 TLG2300 VIDEO4LINUX-2 DRIVER
 M:	Huang Shijie <shijie8@gmail.com>
 M:	Kang Yong <kangyong@telegent.com>
@@ -5712,12 +5874,6 @@ M:	Ion Badulescu <ionut@badula.org>
 S:	Odd Fixes
 F:	drivers/net/starfire*
 
-STRADIS MPEG-2 DECODER DRIVER
-M:	Nathan Laredo <laredo@gnu.org>
-W:	http://www.stradis.com/
-S:	Maintained
-F:	drivers/media/video/stradis.c
-
 SUN3/3X
 M:	Sam Creasey <sammy@sammy.net>
 W:	http://sammy.net/sun3/
@@ -5867,7 +6023,8 @@ F:	drivers/net/tlan.*
 TOMOYO SECURITY MODULE
 M:	Kentaro Takeda <takedakn@nttdata.co.jp>
 M:	Tetsuo Handa <penguin-kernel@I-love.SAKURA.ne.jp>
-L:	tomoyo-users-en@lists.sourceforge.jp (subscribers-only, for developers and users in English)
+L:	tomoyo-dev-en@lists.sourceforge.jp (subscribers-only, for developers in English)
+L:	tomoyo-users-en@lists.sourceforge.jp (subscribers-only, for users in English)
 L:	tomoyo-dev@lists.sourceforge.jp (subscribers-only, for developers in Japanese)
 L:	tomoyo-users@lists.sourceforge.jp (subscribers-only, for users in Japanese)
 W:	http://tomoyo.sourceforge.jp/

Makefile

@@ -224,6 +224,7 @@ ifeq ($(ARCH),m68knommu)
 endif
 
 KCONFIG_CONFIG	?= .config
+export KCONFIG_CONFIG
 
 # SHELL used by kbuild
 CONFIG_SHELL := $(shell if [ -x "$$BASH" ]; then echo $$BASH; \

arch/Kconfig

@@ -175,4 +175,7 @@ config HAVE_PERF_EVENTS_NMI
 config HAVE_ARCH_JUMP_LABEL
 	bool
 
+config HAVE_ARCH_MUTEX_CPU_RELAX
+	bool
+
 source "kernel/gcov/Kconfig"

arch/alpha/include/asm/ioctls.h

@@ -92,6 +92,7 @@
 #define TIOCGSID	0x5429  /* Return the session ID of FD */
 #define TIOCGPTN	_IOR('T',0x30, unsigned int) /* Get Pty Number (of pty-mux device) */
 #define TIOCSPTLCK	_IOW('T',0x31, int)  /* Lock/unlock Pty */
+#define TIOCGDEV	_IOR('T',0x32, unsigned int) /* Get primary device node of /dev/console */
 #define TIOCSIG		_IOW('T',0x36, int)  /* Generate signal on Pty slave */
 
 #define TIOCSERCONFIG	0x5453

arch/alpha/include/asm/perf_event.h

@@ -1,10 +1,4 @@
 #ifndef __ASM_ALPHA_PERF_EVENT_H
 #define __ASM_ALPHA_PERF_EVENT_H
 
-#ifdef CONFIG_PERF_EVENTS
-extern void init_hw_perf_events(void);
-#else
-static inline void init_hw_perf_events(void)    { }
-#endif
-
 #endif /* __ASM_ALPHA_PERF_EVENT_H */

arch/alpha/kernel/irq_alpha.c

@@ -112,8 +112,6 @@ init_IRQ(void)
 	wrent(entInt, 0);
 
 	alpha_mv.init_irq();
-
-	init_hw_perf_events();
 }
 
 /*

arch/alpha/kernel/perf_event.c

@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@
 #include <linux/kernel.h>
 #include <linux/kdebug.h>
 #include <linux/mutex.h>
+#include <linux/init.h>
 
 #include <asm/hwrpb.h>
 #include <asm/atomic.h>
@@ -863,13 +864,13 @@ static void alpha_perf_event_irq_handler(unsigned long la_ptr,
 /*
  * Init call to initialise performance events at kernel startup.
  */
-void __init init_hw_perf_events(void)
+int __init init_hw_perf_events(void)
 {
 	pr_info("Performance events: ");
 
 	if (!supported_cpu()) {
 		pr_cont("No support for your CPU.\n");
-		return;
+		return 0;
 	}
 
 	pr_cont("Supported CPU type!\n");
@@ -881,6 +882,8 @@ void __init init_hw_perf_events(void)
 	/* And set up PMU specification */
 	alpha_pmu = &ev67_pmu;
 
-	perf_pmu_register(&pmu);
-}
+	perf_pmu_register(&pmu, "cpu", PERF_TYPE_RAW);
 
+	return 0;
+}
+early_initcall(init_hw_perf_events);

arch/arm/Kconfig

@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ config ARM
 	bool
 	default y
 	select HAVE_AOUT
+	select HAVE_DMA_API_DEBUG
 	select HAVE_IDE
 	select HAVE_MEMBLOCK
 	select RTC_LIB
@@ -14,6 +15,7 @@ config ARM
 	select HAVE_FUNCTION_TRACER if (!XIP_KERNEL)
 	select HAVE_FTRACE_MCOUNT_RECORD if (!XIP_KERNEL)
 	select HAVE_DYNAMIC_FTRACE if (!XIP_KERNEL)
+	select HAVE_FUNCTION_GRAPH_TRACER if (!THUMB2_KERNEL)
 	select HAVE_GENERIC_DMA_COHERENT
 	select HAVE_KERNEL_GZIP
 	select HAVE_KERNEL_LZO
@@ -23,6 +25,7 @@ config ARM
 	select PERF_USE_VMALLOC
 	select HAVE_REGS_AND_STACK_ACCESS_API
 	select HAVE_HW_BREAKPOINT if (PERF_EVENTS && (CPU_V6 || CPU_V7))
+	select HAVE_C_RECORDMCOUNT
 	help
 	  The ARM series is a line of low-power-consumption RISC chip designs
 	  licensed by ARM Ltd and targeted at embedded applications and
@@ -34,9 +37,15 @@ config ARM
 config HAVE_PWM
 	bool
 
+config MIGHT_HAVE_PCI
+	bool
+
 config SYS_SUPPORTS_APM_EMULATION
 	bool
 
+config HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
+	bool
+
 config GENERIC_GPIO
 	bool
 
@@ -221,7 +230,7 @@ config ARCH_INTEGRATOR
 	bool "ARM Ltd. Integrator family"
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARCH_HAS_CPUFREQ
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select ICST
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select PLAT_VERSATILE
@@ -231,7 +240,8 @@ config ARCH_INTEGRATOR
 config ARCH_REALVIEW
 	bool "ARM Ltd. RealView family"
 	select ARM_AMBA
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select ICST
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
@@ -245,7 +255,8 @@ config ARCH_VERSATILE
 	bool "ARM Ltd. Versatile family"
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARM_VIC
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select ICST
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
@@ -259,9 +270,10 @@ config ARCH_VEXPRESS
 	select ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARM_TIMER_SP804
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select HAVE_CLK
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select ICST
 	select PLAT_VERSATILE
 	help
@@ -280,7 +292,7 @@ config ARCH_BCMRING
 	depends on MMU
 	select CPU_V6
 	select ARM_AMBA
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
 	help
@@ -298,6 +310,7 @@ config ARCH_CNS3XXX
 	select CPU_V6
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select ARM_GIC
+	select MIGHT_HAVE_PCI
 	select PCI_DOMAINS if PCI
 	help
 	  Support for Cavium Networks CNS3XXX platform.
@@ -327,7 +340,7 @@ config ARCH_EP93XX
 	select CPU_ARM920T
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARM_VIC
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	select ARCH_HAS_HOLES_MEMORYMODEL
 	select ARCH_USES_GETTIMEOFFSET
@@ -347,14 +360,22 @@ config ARCH_MXC
 	bool "Freescale MXC/iMX-based"
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	help
 	  Support for Freescale MXC/iMX-based family of processors
 
+config ARCH_MXS
+	bool "Freescale MXS-based"
+	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
+	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	help
+	  Support for Freescale MXS-based family of processors
+
 config ARCH_STMP3XXX
 	bool "Freescale STMP3xxx"
 	select CPU_ARM926T
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select USB_ARCH_HAS_EHCI
@@ -433,6 +454,8 @@ config ARCH_IXP4XX
 	select CPU_XSCALE
 	select GENERIC_GPIO
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
+	select MIGHT_HAVE_PCI
 	select DMABOUNCE if PCI
 	help
 	  Support for Intel's IXP4XX (XScale) family of processors.
@@ -472,7 +495,7 @@ config ARCH_LPC32XX
 	select HAVE_IDE
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select USB_ARCH_HAS_OHCI
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_TIME
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	help
@@ -506,8 +529,9 @@ config ARCH_MMP
 	bool "Marvell PXA168/910/MMP2"
 	depends on MMU
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select TICK_ONESHOT
 	select PLAT_PXA
 	select SPARSE_IRQ
@@ -539,7 +563,7 @@ config ARCH_W90X900
 	bool "Nuvoton W90X900 CPU"
 	select CPU_ARM926T
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	help
 	  Support for Nuvoton (Winbond logic dept.) ARM9 processor,
@@ -553,18 +577,19 @@ config ARCH_W90X900
 config ARCH_NUC93X
 	bool "Nuvoton NUC93X CPU"
 	select CPU_ARM926T
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	help
 	  Support for Nuvoton (Winbond logic dept.) NUC93X MCU,The NUC93X is a
 	  low-power and high performance MPEG-4/JPEG multimedia controller chip.
 
 config ARCH_TEGRA
 	bool "NVIDIA Tegra"
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_TIME
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select GENERIC_GPIO
 	select HAVE_CLK
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select ARCH_HAS_BARRIERS if CACHE_L2X0
 	select ARCH_HAS_CPUFREQ
 	help
@@ -574,7 +599,7 @@ config ARCH_TEGRA
 config ARCH_PNX4008
 	bool "Philips Nexperia PNX4008 Mobile"
 	select CPU_ARM926T
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select ARCH_USES_GETTIMEOFFSET
 	help
 	  This enables support for Philips PNX4008 mobile platform.
@@ -584,9 +609,10 @@ config ARCH_PXA
 	depends on MMU
 	select ARCH_MTD_XIP
 	select ARCH_HAS_CPUFREQ
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select TICK_ONESHOT
 	select PLAT_PXA
 	select SPARSE_IRQ
@@ -606,9 +632,15 @@ config ARCH_MSM
 	  (clock and power control, etc).
 
 config ARCH_SHMOBILE
-	bool "Renesas SH-Mobile"
+	bool "Renesas SH-Mobile / R-Mobile"
+	select HAVE_CLK
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
+	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select NO_IOPORT
+	select SPARSE_IRQ
+	select MULTI_IRQ_HANDLER
 	help
-	  Support for Renesas's SH-Mobile ARM platforms
+	  Support for Renesas's SH-Mobile and R-Mobile ARM platforms.
 
 config ARCH_RPC
 	bool "RiscPC"
@@ -635,6 +667,7 @@ config ARCH_SA1100
 	select CPU_FREQ
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select HAVE_CLK
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select TICK_ONESHOT
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	help
@@ -761,7 +794,7 @@ config ARCH_TCC_926
 	bool "Telechips TCC ARM926-based systems"
 	select CPU_ARM926T
 	select HAVE_CLK
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	help
 	  Support for Telechips TCC ARM926-based systems.
@@ -781,11 +814,12 @@ config ARCH_U300
 	bool "ST-Ericsson U300 Series"
 	depends on MMU
 	select CPU_ARM926T
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select HAVE_TCM
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARM_VIC
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_GPIO
 	help
 	  Support for ST-Ericsson U300 series mobile platforms.
@@ -795,8 +829,9 @@ config ARCH_U8500
 	select CPU_V7
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
+	select ARCH_HAS_CPUFREQ
 	help
 	  Support for ST-Ericsson's Ux500 architecture
 
@@ -805,7 +840,7 @@ config ARCH_NOMADIK
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARM_VIC
 	select CPU_ARM926T
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	help
@@ -817,7 +852,7 @@ config ARCH_DAVINCI
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	select ZONE_DMA
 	select HAVE_IDE
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_ALLOCATOR
 	select ARCH_HAS_HOLES_MEMORYMODEL
 	help
@@ -829,6 +864,7 @@ config ARCH_OMAP
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
 	select ARCH_HAS_CPUFREQ
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 	select ARCH_HAS_HOLES_MEMORYMODEL
 	help
 	  Support for TI's OMAP platform (OMAP1/2/3/4).
@@ -837,7 +873,7 @@ config PLAT_SPEAR
 	bool "ST SPEAr"
 	select ARM_AMBA
 	select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB
-	select COMMON_CLKDEV
+	select CLKDEV_LOOKUP
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	select HAVE_CLK
 	help
@@ -902,6 +938,8 @@ source "arch/arm/mach-mv78xx0/Kconfig"
 
 source "arch/arm/plat-mxc/Kconfig"
 
+source "arch/arm/mach-mxs/Kconfig"
+
 source "arch/arm/mach-netx/Kconfig"
 
 source "arch/arm/mach-nomadik/Kconfig"
@@ -982,9 +1020,11 @@ config ARCH_ACORN
 config PLAT_IOP
 	bool
 	select GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 
 config PLAT_ORION
 	bool
+	select HAVE_SCHED_CLOCK
 
 config PLAT_PXA
 	bool
@@ -999,8 +1039,8 @@ source arch/arm/mm/Kconfig
 
 config IWMMXT
 	bool "Enable iWMMXt support"
-	depends on CPU_XSCALE || CPU_XSC3 || CPU_MOHAWK
-	default y if PXA27x || PXA3xx || ARCH_MMP
+	depends on CPU_XSCALE || CPU_XSC3 || CPU_MOHAWK || CPU_PJ4
+	default y if PXA27x || PXA3xx || PXA95x || ARCH_MMP
 	help
 	  Enable support for iWMMXt context switching at run time if
 	  running on a CPU that supports it.
@@ -1017,6 +1057,11 @@ config CPU_HAS_PMU
 	default y
 	bool
 
+config MULTI_IRQ_HANDLER
+	bool
+	help
+	  Allow each machine to specify it's own IRQ handler at run time.
+
 if !MMU
 source "arch/arm/Kconfig-nommu"
 endif
@@ -1164,7 +1209,7 @@ config ISA_DMA_API
 	bool
 
 config PCI
-	bool "PCI support" if ARCH_INTEGRATOR_AP || ARCH_VERSATILE_PB || ARCH_IXP4XX || ARCH_KS8695 || MACH_ARMCORE || ARCH_CNS3XXX
+	bool "PCI support" if MIGHT_HAVE_PCI
 	help
 	  Find out whether you have a PCI motherboard. PCI is the name of a
 	  bus system, i.e. the way the CPU talks to the other stuff inside
@@ -1175,6 +1220,12 @@ config PCI_DOMAINS
 	bool
 	depends on PCI
 
+config PCI_NANOENGINE
+	bool "BSE nanoEngine PCI support"
+	depends on SA1100_NANOENGINE
+	help
+	  Enable PCI on the BSE nanoEngine board.
+
 config PCI_SYSCALL
 	def_bool PCI
 
@@ -1205,10 +1256,11 @@ config SMP
 	depends on EXPERIMENTAL
 	depends on GENERIC_CLOCKEVENTS
 	depends on REALVIEW_EB_ARM11MP || REALVIEW_EB_A9MP || \
-		 MACH_REALVIEW_PB11MP || MACH_REALVIEW_PBX || ARCH_OMAP4 ||\
-		 ARCH_S5PV310 || ARCH_TEGRA || ARCH_U8500 || ARCH_VEXPRESS_CA9X4
+		 MACH_REALVIEW_PB11MP || MACH_REALVIEW_PBX || ARCH_OMAP4 || \
+		 ARCH_S5PV310 || ARCH_TEGRA || ARCH_U8500 || ARCH_VEXPRESS_CA9X4 || \
+		 ARCH_MSM_SCORPIONMP || ARCH_SHMOBILE
 	select USE_GENERIC_SMP_HELPERS
-	select HAVE_ARM_SCU
+	select HAVE_ARM_SCU if !ARCH_MSM_SCORPIONMP
 	help
 	  This enables support for systems with more than one CPU. If you have
 	  a system with only one CPU, like most personal computers, say N. If
@@ -1229,7 +1281,7 @@ config SMP
 config SMP_ON_UP
 	bool "Allow booting SMP kernel on uniprocessor systems (EXPERIMENTAL)"
 	depends on EXPERIMENTAL
-	depends on SMP && !XIP && !THUMB2_KERNEL
+	depends on SMP && !XIP
 	default y
 	help
 	  SMP kernels contain instructions which fail on non-SMP processors.
@@ -1248,6 +1300,7 @@ config HAVE_ARM_SCU
 config HAVE_ARM_TWD
 	bool
 	depends on SMP
+	select TICK_ONESHOT
 	help
 	  This options enables support for the ARM timer and watchdog unit
 
@@ -1283,6 +1336,7 @@ config NR_CPUS
 config HOTPLUG_CPU
 	bool "Support for hot-pluggable CPUs (EXPERIMENTAL)"
 	depends on SMP && HOTPLUG && EXPERIMENTAL
+	depends on !ARCH_MSM
 	help
 	  Say Y here to experiment with turning CPUs off and on.  CPUs
 	  can be controlled through /sys/devices/system/cpu.
@@ -1291,7 +1345,7 @@ config LOCAL_TIMERS
 	bool "Use local timer interrupts"
 	depends on SMP
 	default y
-	select HAVE_ARM_TWD
+	select HAVE_ARM_TWD if !ARCH_MSM_SCORPIONMP
 	help
 	  Enable support for local timers on SMP platforms, rather then the
 	  legacy IPI broadcast method.  Local timers allows the system
@@ -1310,7 +1364,7 @@ config HZ
 	default 100
 
 config THUMB2_KERNEL
-	bool "Compile the kernel in Thumb-2 mode"
+	bool "Compile the kernel in Thumb-2 mode (EXPERIMENTAL)"
 	depends on CPU_V7 && !CPU_V6 && EXPERIMENTAL
 	select AEABI
 	select ARM_ASM_UNIFIED
@@ -1524,6 +1578,7 @@ config SECCOMP
 
 config CC_STACKPROTECTOR
 	bool "Enable -fstack-protector buffer overflow detection (EXPERIMENTAL)"
+	depends on EXPERIMENTAL
 	help
 	  This option turns on the -fstack-protector GCC feature. This
 	  feature puts, at the beginning of functions, a canary value on
@@ -1650,6 +1705,19 @@ config ATAGS_PROC
 	  Should the atags used to boot the kernel be exported in an "atags"
 	  file in procfs. Useful with kexec.
 
+config CRASH_DUMP
+	bool "Build kdump crash kernel (EXPERIMENTAL)"
+	depends on EXPERIMENTAL
+	help
+	  Generate crash dump after being started by kexec. This should
+	  be normally only set in special crash dump kernels which are
+	  loaded in the main kernel with kexec-tools into a specially
+	  reserved region and then later executed after a crash by
+	  kdump/kexec. The crash dump kernel must be compiled to a
+	  memory address not used by the main kernel
+
+	  For more details see Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
+
 config AUTO_ZRELADDR
 	bool "Auto calculation of the decompressed kernel image address"
 	depends on !ZBOOT_ROM && !ARCH_U300
@@ -1707,7 +1775,7 @@ config CPU_FREQ_S3C
 	  Internal configuration node for common cpufreq on Samsung SoC
 
 config CPU_FREQ_S3C24XX
-	bool "CPUfreq driver for Samsung S3C24XX series CPUs"
+	bool "CPUfreq driver for Samsung S3C24XX series CPUs (EXPERIMENTAL)"
 	depends on ARCH_S3C2410 && CPU_FREQ && EXPERIMENTAL
 	select CPU_FREQ_S3C
 	help
@@ -1719,7 +1787,7 @@ config CPU_FREQ_S3C24XX
 	  If in doubt, say N.
 
 config CPU_FREQ_S3C24XX_PLL
-	bool "Support CPUfreq changing of PLL frequency"
+	bool "Support CPUfreq changing of PLL frequency (EXPERIMENTAL)"
 	depends on CPU_FREQ_S3C24XX && EXPERIMENTAL
 	help
 	  Compile in support for changing the PLL frequency from the

arch/arm/Kconfig.debug

@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ config STRICT_DEVMEM
 config FRAME_POINTER
 	bool
 	depends on !THUMB2_KERNEL
-	default y if !ARM_UNWIND
+	default y if !ARM_UNWIND || FUNCTION_GRAPH_TRACER
 	help
 	  If you say N here, the resulting kernel will be slightly smaller and
 	  faster. However, if neither FRAME_POINTER nor ARM_UNWIND are enabled,
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ config FRAME_POINTER
 	  reported is severely limited.
 
 config ARM_UNWIND
-	bool "Enable stack unwinding support"
+	bool "Enable stack unwinding support (EXPERIMENTAL)"
 	depends on AEABI && EXPERIMENTAL
 	default y
 	help

arch/arm/Makefile

@@ -154,10 +154,11 @@ machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MSM)		:= msm
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MV78XX0)		:= mv78xx0
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MX1)		:= imx
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MX2)		:= imx
-machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MX25)		:= mx25
+machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MX25)		:= imx
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MX3)		:= mx3
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MX5)		:= mx5
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MXC91231)		:= mxc91231
+machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_MXS)		:= mxs
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NETX)		:= netx
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NOMADIK)		:= nomadik
 machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NS9XXX)		:= ns9xxx

arch/arm/boot/compressed/Makefile

@@ -45,6 +45,10 @@ else
 endif
 endif
 
+ifeq ($(CONFIG_ARCH_SHMOBILE),y)
+OBJS		+= head-shmobile.o
+endif
+
 #
 # We now have a PIC decompressor implementation.  Decompressors running
 # from RAM should not define ZTEXTADDR.  Decompressors running directly

arch/arm/boot/compressed/head-shmobile.S

@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+/*
+ * The head-file for SH-Mobile ARM platforms
+ *
+ * Kuninori Morimoto <kuninori.morimoto.gx@renesas.com>
+ * Simon Horman <horms@verge.net.au>
+ *
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ * the Free Software Foundation; version 2 of the License.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+ */
+
+#ifdef CONFIG_ZBOOT_ROM
+
+	.section	".start", "ax"
+
+	/* load board-specific initialization code */
+#include <mach/zboot.h>
+
+	b	1f
+__atags:@ tag #1
+	.long	12			@ tag->hdr.size = tag_size(tag_core);
+	.long	0x54410001		@ tag->hdr.tag = ATAG_CORE;
+	.long   0			@ tag->u.core.flags = 0;
+	.long	0			@ tag->u.core.pagesize = 0;
+	.long	0			@ tag->u.core.rootdev = 0;
+	@ tag #2
+	.long	8			@ tag->hdr.size = tag_size(tag_mem32);
+	.long	0x54410002		@ tag->hdr.tag = ATAG_MEM;
+	.long	CONFIG_MEMORY_SIZE	@ tag->u.mem.size = CONFIG_MEMORY_SIZE;
+	.long	CONFIG_MEMORY_START	@ @ tag->u.mem.start = CONFIG_MEMORY_START;
+	@ tag #3
+	.long	0			@ tag->hdr.size = 0
+	.long	0			@ tag->hdr.tag = ATAG_NONE;
+1:
+
+	/* Set board ID necessary for boot */
+	ldr	r7, 1f				@ Set machine type register
+	adr	r8, __atags			@ Set atag register
+	b	2f
+
+1 :	.long MACH_TYPE
+2 :
+
+#endif /* CONFIG_ZBOOT_ROM */

arch/arm/common/Kconfig

@@ -37,7 +37,3 @@ config SHARP_PARAM
 
 config SHARP_SCOOP
 	bool
-
-config COMMON_CLKDEV
-	bool
-	select HAVE_CLK

arch/arm/common/Makefile

@@ -17,3 +17,4 @@ obj-$(CONFIG_ARCH_IXP2000)	+= uengine.o
 obj-$(CONFIG_ARCH_IXP23XX)	+= uengine.o
 obj-$(CONFIG_PCI_HOST_ITE8152)  += it8152.o
 obj-$(CONFIG_COMMON_CLKDEV)	+= clkdev.o
+obj-$(CONFIG_ARM_TIMER_SP804)	+= timer-sp.o

arch/arm/common/clkdev.c

@@ -1,179 +0,0 @@
-/*
- *  arch/arm/common/clkdev.c
- *
- *  Copyright (C) 2008 Russell King.
- *
- * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
- * published by the Free Software Foundation.
- *
- * Helper for the clk API to assist looking up a struct clk.
- */
-#include <linux/module.h>
-#include <linux/kernel.h>
-#include <linux/device.h>
-#include <linux/list.h>
-#include <linux/errno.h>
-#include <linux/err.h>
-#include <linux/string.h>
-#include <linux/mutex.h>
-#include <linux/clk.h>
-#include <linux/slab.h>
-
-#include <asm/clkdev.h>
-#include <mach/clkdev.h>
-
-static LIST_HEAD(clocks);
-static DEFINE_MUTEX(clocks_mutex);
-
-/*
- * Find the correct struct clk for the device and connection ID.
- * We do slightly fuzzy matching here:
- *  An entry with a NULL ID is assumed to be a wildcard.
- *  If an entry has a device ID, it must match
- *  If an entry has a connection ID, it must match
- * Then we take the most specific entry - with the following
- * order of precedence: dev+con > dev only > con only.
- */
-static struct clk *clk_find(const char *dev_id, const char *con_id)
-{
-	struct clk_lookup *p;
-	struct clk *clk = NULL;
-	int match, best = 0;
-
-	list_for_each_entry(p, &clocks, node) {
-		match = 0;
-		if (p->dev_id) {
-			if (!dev_id || strcmp(p->dev_id, dev_id))
-				continue;
-			match += 2;
-		}
-		if (p->con_id) {
-			if (!con_id || strcmp(p->con_id, con_id))
-				continue;
-			match += 1;
-		}
-
-		if (match > best) {
-			clk = p->clk;
-			if (match != 3)
-				best = match;
-			else
-				break;
-		}
-	}
-	return clk;
-}
-
-struct clk *clk_get_sys(const char *dev_id, const char *con_id)
-{
-	struct clk *clk;
-
-	mutex_lock(&clocks_mutex);
-	clk = clk_find(dev_id, con_id);
-	if (clk && !__clk_get(clk))
-		clk = NULL;
-	mutex_unlock(&clocks_mutex);
-
-	return clk ? clk : ERR_PTR(-ENOENT);
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clk_get_sys);
-
-struct clk *clk_get(struct device *dev, const char *con_id)
-{
-	const char *dev_id = dev ? dev_name(dev) : NULL;
-
-	return clk_get_sys(dev_id, con_id);
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clk_get);
-
-void clk_put(struct clk *clk)
-{
-	__clk_put(clk);
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clk_put);
-
-void clkdev_add(struct clk_lookup *cl)
-{
-	mutex_lock(&clocks_mutex);
-	list_add_tail(&cl->node, &clocks);
-	mutex_unlock(&clocks_mutex);
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clkdev_add);
-
-void __init clkdev_add_table(struct clk_lookup *cl, size_t num)
-{
-	mutex_lock(&clocks_mutex);
-	while (num--) {
-		list_add_tail(&cl->node, &clocks);
-		cl++;
-	}
-	mutex_unlock(&clocks_mutex);
-}
-
-#define MAX_DEV_ID	20
-#define MAX_CON_ID	16
-
-struct clk_lookup_alloc {
-	struct clk_lookup cl;
-	char	dev_id[MAX_DEV_ID];
-	char	con_id[MAX_CON_ID];
-};
-
-struct clk_lookup *clkdev_alloc(struct clk *clk, const char *con_id,
-	const char *dev_fmt, ...)
-{
-	struct clk_lookup_alloc *cla;
-
-	cla = kzalloc(sizeof(*cla), GFP_KERNEL);
-	if (!cla)
-		return NULL;
-
-	cla->cl.clk = clk;
-	if (con_id) {
-		strlcpy(cla->con_id, con_id, sizeof(cla->con_id));
-		cla->cl.con_id = cla->con_id;
-	}
-
-	if (dev_fmt) {
-		va_list ap;
-
-		va_start(ap, dev_fmt);
-		vscnprintf(cla->dev_id, sizeof(cla->dev_id), dev_fmt, ap);
-		cla->cl.dev_id = cla->dev_id;
-		va_end(ap);
-	}
-
-	return &cla->cl;
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clkdev_alloc);
-
-int clk_add_alias(const char *alias, const char *alias_dev_name, char *id,
-	struct device *dev)
-{
-	struct clk *r = clk_get(dev, id);
-	struct clk_lookup *l;
-
-	if (IS_ERR(r))
-		return PTR_ERR(r);
-
-	l = clkdev_alloc(r, alias, alias_dev_name);
-	clk_put(r);
-	if (!l)
-		return -ENODEV;
-	clkdev_add(l);
-	return 0;
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clk_add_alias);
-
-/*
- * clkdev_drop - remove a clock dynamically allocated
- */
-void clkdev_drop(struct clk_lookup *cl)
-{
-	mutex_lock(&clocks_mutex);
-	list_del(&cl->node);
-	mutex_unlock(&clocks_mutex);
-	kfree(cl);
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(clkdev_drop);

arch/arm/common/dmabounce.c

@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ static inline void unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
  * substitute the safe buffer for the unsafe one.
  * (basically move the buffer from an unsafe area to a safe one)
  */
-dma_addr_t dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *ptr, size_t size,
+dma_addr_t __dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *ptr, size_t size,
 		enum dma_data_direction dir)
 {
 	dev_dbg(dev, "%s(ptr=%p,size=%d,dir=%x)\n",
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ dma_addr_t dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *ptr, size_t size,
 
 	return map_single(dev, ptr, size, dir);
 }
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(dma_map_single);
+EXPORT_SYMBOL(__dma_map_single);
 
 /*
  * see if a mapped address was really a "safe" buffer and if so, copy
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL(dma_map_single);
  * the safe buffer.  (basically return things back to the way they
  * should be)
  */
-void dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
+void __dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
 		enum dma_data_direction dir)
 {
 	dev_dbg(dev, "%s(ptr=%p,size=%d,dir=%x)\n",
@@ -354,9 +354,9 @@ void dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
 
 	unmap_single(dev, dma_addr, size, dir);
 }
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(dma_unmap_single);
+EXPORT_SYMBOL(__dma_unmap_single);
 
-dma_addr_t dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
+dma_addr_t __dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
 		unsigned long offset, size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir)
 {
 	dev_dbg(dev, "%s(page=%p,off=%#lx,size=%zx,dir=%x)\n",
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ dma_addr_t dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
 
 	return map_single(dev, page_address(page) + offset, size, dir);
 }
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(dma_map_page);
+EXPORT_SYMBOL(__dma_map_page);
 
 /*
  * see if a mapped address was really a "safe" buffer and if so, copy
@@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL(dma_map_page);
  * the safe buffer.  (basically return things back to the way they
  * should be)
  */
-void dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
+void __dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
 		enum dma_data_direction dir)
 {
 	dev_dbg(dev, "%s(ptr=%p,size=%d,dir=%x)\n",
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ void dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
 
 	unmap_single(dev, dma_addr, size, dir);
 }
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(dma_unmap_page);
+EXPORT_SYMBOL(__dma_unmap_page);
 
 int dmabounce_sync_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t addr,
 		unsigned long off, size_t sz, enum dma_data_direction dir)

arch/arm/common/gic.c

@@ -35,6 +35,9 @@
 
 static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(irq_controller_lock);
 
+/* Address of GIC 0 CPU interface */
+void __iomem *gic_cpu_base_addr __read_mostly;
+
 struct gic_chip_data {
 	unsigned int irq_offset;
 	void __iomem *dist_base;
@@ -45,7 +48,7 @@ struct gic_chip_data {
 #define MAX_GIC_NR	1
 #endif
 
-static struct gic_chip_data gic_data[MAX_GIC_NR];
+static struct gic_chip_data gic_data[MAX_GIC_NR] __read_mostly;
 
 static inline void __iomem *gic_dist_base(unsigned int irq)
 {
@@ -213,21 +216,16 @@ void __init gic_cascade_irq(unsigned int gic_nr, unsigned int irq)
 	set_irq_chained_handler(irq, gic_handle_cascade_irq);
 }
 
-void __init gic_dist_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base,
-			  unsigned int irq_start)
+static void __init gic_dist_init(struct gic_chip_data *gic,
+	unsigned int irq_start)
 {
 	unsigned int gic_irqs, irq_limit, i;
+	void __iomem *base = gic->dist_base;
 	u32 cpumask = 1 << smp_processor_id();
 
-	if (gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR)
-		BUG();
-
 	cpumask |= cpumask << 8;
 	cpumask |= cpumask << 16;
 
-	gic_data[gic_nr].dist_base = base;
-	gic_data[gic_nr].irq_offset = (irq_start - 1) & ~31;
-
 	writel(0, base + GIC_DIST_CTRL);
 
 	/*
@@ -267,7 +265,7 @@ void __init gic_dist_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base,
 	/*
 	 * Limit number of interrupts registered to the platform maximum
 	 */
-	irq_limit = gic_data[gic_nr].irq_offset + gic_irqs;
+	irq_limit = gic->irq_offset + gic_irqs;
 	if (WARN_ON(irq_limit > NR_IRQS))
 		irq_limit = NR_IRQS;
 
@@ -276,7 +274,7 @@ void __init gic_dist_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base,
 	 */
 	for (i = irq_start; i < irq_limit; i++) {
 		set_irq_chip(i, &gic_chip);
-		set_irq_chip_data(i, &gic_data[gic_nr]);
+		set_irq_chip_data(i, gic);
 		set_irq_handler(i, handle_level_irq);
 		set_irq_flags(i, IRQF_VALID | IRQF_PROBE);
 	}
@@ -284,19 +282,12 @@ void __init gic_dist_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base,
 	writel(1, base + GIC_DIST_CTRL);
 }
 
-void __cpuinit gic_cpu_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base)
+static void __cpuinit gic_cpu_init(struct gic_chip_data *gic)
 {
-	void __iomem *dist_base;
+	void __iomem *dist_base = gic->dist_base;
+	void __iomem *base = gic->cpu_base;
 	int i;
 
-	if (gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR)
-		BUG();
-
-	dist_base = gic_data[gic_nr].dist_base;
-	BUG_ON(!dist_base);
-
-	gic_data[gic_nr].cpu_base = base;
-
 	/*
 	 * Deal with the banked PPI and SGI interrupts - disable all
 	 * PPI interrupts, ensure all SGI interrupts are enabled.
@@ -314,6 +305,42 @@ void __cpuinit gic_cpu_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base)
 	writel(1, base + GIC_CPU_CTRL);
 }
 
+void __init gic_init(unsigned int gic_nr, unsigned int irq_start,
+	void __iomem *dist_base, void __iomem *cpu_base)
+{
+	struct gic_chip_data *gic;
+
+	BUG_ON(gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR);
+
+	gic = &gic_data[gic_nr];
+	gic->dist_base = dist_base;
+	gic->cpu_base = cpu_base;
+	gic->irq_offset = (irq_start - 1) & ~31;
+
+	if (gic_nr == 0)
+		gic_cpu_base_addr = cpu_base;
+
+	gic_dist_init(gic, irq_start);
+	gic_cpu_init(gic);
+}
+
+void __cpuinit gic_secondary_init(unsigned int gic_nr)
+{
+	BUG_ON(gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR);
+
+	gic_cpu_init(&gic_data[gic_nr]);
+}
+
+void __cpuinit gic_enable_ppi(unsigned int irq)
+{
+	unsigned long flags;
+
+	local_irq_save(flags);
+	irq_to_desc(irq)->status |= IRQ_NOPROBE;
+	gic_unmask_irq(irq);
+	local_irq_restore(flags);
+}
+
 #ifdef CONFIG_SMP
 void gic_raise_softirq(const struct cpumask *mask, unsigned int irq)
 {

arch/arm/common/timer-sp.c

@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+/*
+ *  linux/arch/arm/common/timer-sp.c
+ *
+ *  Copyright (C) 1999 - 2003 ARM Limited
+ *  Copyright (C) 2000 Deep Blue Solutions Ltd
+ *
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ * (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+ */
+#include <linux/clocksource.h>
+#include <linux/clockchips.h>
+#include <linux/interrupt.h>
+#include <linux/irq.h>
+#include <linux/io.h>
+
+#include <asm/hardware/arm_timer.h>
+
+/*
+ * These timers are currently always setup to be clocked at 1MHz.
+ */
+#define TIMER_FREQ_KHZ	(1000)
+#define TIMER_RELOAD	(TIMER_FREQ_KHZ * 1000 / HZ)
+
+static void __iomem *clksrc_base;
+
+static cycle_t sp804_read(struct clocksource *cs)
+{
+	return ~readl(clksrc_base + TIMER_VALUE);
+}
+
+static struct clocksource clocksource_sp804 = {
+	.name		= "timer3",
+	.rating		= 200,
+	.read		= sp804_read,
+	.mask		= CLOCKSOURCE_MASK(32),
+	.flags		= CLOCK_SOURCE_IS_CONTINUOUS,
+};
+
+void __init sp804_clocksource_init(void __iomem *base)
+{
+	struct clocksource *cs = &clocksource_sp804;
+
+	clksrc_base = base;
+
+	/* setup timer 0 as free-running clocksource */
+	writel(0, clksrc_base + TIMER_CTRL);
+	writel(0xffffffff, clksrc_base + TIMER_LOAD);
+	writel(0xffffffff, clksrc_base + TIMER_VALUE);
+	writel(TIMER_CTRL_32BIT | TIMER_CTRL_ENABLE | TIMER_CTRL_PERIODIC,
+		clksrc_base + TIMER_CTRL);
+
+	clocksource_register_khz(cs, TIMER_FREQ_KHZ);
+}
+
+
+static void __iomem *clkevt_base;
+
+/*
+ * IRQ handler for the timer
+ */
+static irqreturn_t sp804_timer_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id)
+{
+	struct clock_event_device *evt = dev_id;
+
+	/* clear the interrupt */
+	writel(1, clkevt_base + TIMER_INTCLR);
+
+	evt->event_handler(evt);
+
+	return IRQ_HANDLED;
+}
+
+static void sp804_set_mode(enum clock_event_mode mode,
+	struct clock_event_device *evt)
+{
+	unsigned long ctrl = TIMER_CTRL_32BIT | TIMER_CTRL_IE;
+
+	writel(ctrl, clkevt_base + TIMER_CTRL);
+
+	switch (mode) {
+	case CLOCK_EVT_MODE_PERIODIC:
+		writel(TIMER_RELOAD, clkevt_base + TIMER_LOAD);
+		ctrl |= TIMER_CTRL_PERIODIC | TIMER_CTRL_ENABLE;
+		break;
+
+	case CLOCK_EVT_MODE_ONESHOT:
+		/* period set, and timer enabled in 'next_event' hook */
+		ctrl |= TIMER_CTRL_ONESHOT;
+		break;
+
+	case CLOCK_EVT_MODE_UNUSED:
+	case CLOCK_EVT_MODE_SHUTDOWN:
+	default:
+		break;
+	}
+
+	writel(ctrl, clkevt_base + TIMER_CTRL);
+}
+
+static int sp804_set_next_event(unsigned long next,
+	struct clock_event_device *evt)
+{
+	unsigned long ctrl = readl(clkevt_base + TIMER_CTRL);
+
+	writel(next, clkevt_base + TIMER_LOAD);
+	writel(ctrl | TIMER_CTRL_ENABLE, clkevt_base + TIMER_CTRL);
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static struct clock_event_device sp804_clockevent = {
+	.name		= "timer0",
+	.shift		= 32,
+	.features       = CLOCK_EVT_FEAT_PERIODIC | CLOCK_EVT_FEAT_ONESHOT,
+	.set_mode	= sp804_set_mode,
+	.set_next_event	= sp804_set_next_event,
+	.rating		= 300,
+	.cpumask	= cpu_all_mask,
+};
+
+static struct irqaction sp804_timer_irq = {
+	.name		= "timer",
+	.flags		= IRQF_DISABLED | IRQF_TIMER | IRQF_IRQPOLL,
+	.handler	= sp804_timer_interrupt,
+	.dev_id		= &sp804_clockevent,
+};
+
+void __init sp804_clockevents_init(void __iomem *base, unsigned int timer_irq)
+{
+	struct clock_event_device *evt = &sp804_clockevent;
+
+	clkevt_base = base;
+
+	evt->irq = timer_irq;
+	evt->mult = div_sc(TIMER_FREQ_KHZ, NSEC_PER_MSEC, evt->shift);
+	evt->max_delta_ns = clockevent_delta2ns(0xffffffff, evt);
+	evt->min_delta_ns = clockevent_delta2ns(0xf, evt);
+
+	setup_irq(timer_irq, &sp804_timer_irq);
+	clockevents_register_device(evt);
+}